PF 3" L09 ,W44 Copy 1 MM QassJ; Rnnk - CONCISE GERMAN GRAMMAR WITH AN ENTIRELY NEW ARRANGEMENT OF DECLENSIONS AND EXERCISES UN THE MOST FREQUENT OCCURRENCES IN COMMON LIFE ADAPTED TO EVERY CLASS OF STUDENTS AND ESPE- CIALLY USEFUL TO TRAVELLERS. hv M. WERTHEIM, LECTURER OF ENGLISH AT THE CARLSRUHE COLLEGE '. FORMERLY TUTOR OF THE HERMAN LANGUAGE AT THE UNIVERSITY OF OXFORD. CARLSRUHE: A. BIELEFELD. BLACK & ARMSTRONG, LONDON. — GAL1GNANY « COMP ; PARIS LOUIS KOHNEN, COLOGNE — C, MUQUARDT . BRUSSELS 1841. • - s r Engineers School Li &y. (28,1331 Hiitilod by Malscb & Yogel, Carlsruhe. w Paye 19 29 42 57 66 TO 94 95 ids 130 165 171 172 200 217 225 229 138, Line 12 3 4 16 29 17 18 4 Cobs.) 5 14 „ ERRATA. For ^tel *, game to the second and third cm em ordinal fa mm: f seiL 7 QPr. Ind.) 11 Cobs.) 8 4 1 6 2 9 IX. encfn-eefen modal m. freqletten troopes antedecent sons , agressors Read 3tel, aim to thee first and second emeit cardinal obi fammt scil. Mil. evfdn-ecfc moodal n. Sefletfcen troops antecedent sons ; aggressors 251 p omitted between lines 18 and ±z> III. £kr(cKften, to extinguish, *erli(? VII. T T Can .... XV. 2 JV . VII. 3 Command, to ; P. 220. Allow , Page 220. Conjunction . V. 5 Any . II. 1 VI. 4 Apposition . . XXX. 3 VII. 1 Article V. 9 Dative . . , VIII, 2 ., . XIV, 2 „ . . IX. 9 IV Exercises. Obsei v. Exercises. Observ Dative . . . X. 2 stead of act. XVI. 3 I • ... XIII. 4 Permit, to; P. 220. 11 ... XV. ## Perfect tense VII. 4 11 ... XVI. 2 Personal pron. I. 1 ,, ... XXII. 2 n n VIII. 4 Defining word X. 5 n n XIII. 3 Demonstr. pron. III. 2 n n XXIII. 2 11 11 VI 5 Possessive ,, XXXII. 1 11 11 XVI. 4 Potential XV. 9 Desire, to; P. 220 Predicate III. i Do, to . . . VIII. 5 Preposition VII. i Either. . . . XII. i Relative Pron. VI. 6 Get, to ( p 22f Have , to | F * £ * 1 n n X. 3 . 11 11 XIII. 3 Historical style P .231. l" 11 XXVIII. 3 Imperative . . II. 10 So ... . V. 5 Infinitive . . I. 12 eollen . . XIII. 5 n V, 10 Shall . . . IX. 1 n XIV. 4 Stress oraccen n XXI. 3 P. 4* gaffen P. 220. Subjunctive VI. 7.8 Languages . . xni. §§ n VII. 10 ^txxXt .... XVI. 5 n XIV. 1.4 Make, to; P. 220. .V . XVI. 6 Man .... III. 3 11 XX. 3 May .... XV. 2 Suffer, to; P. 220. Moje .... XI. 3 That . . . I. 6 Much .... X. 4 n ... VI. 4 Negation . . I. 7 ,, ... VII. 9 None . . . . . IX. T „ ... IX. 2 Not .... XXII. 1 Then . . . V. 5 Noun, verbal . XXIII. 1 Thing . . XXXI. 3 Objective case XXIII. 2 Verb, act. . VIII. 1 Oblique cases . IX. 3 n n . XVI. 3 Of VII. 8 „ neut. XIII. 1 Order, to; P. 220. „ passive . XVI. 3 Order direct and „ auxiliary XXI. 3 indirect . . VIII. 3 n ii XXVIII. 3 Participle pres. VI. 1 „ impers. XXXIV. 2 11 11 XXII. 2 Verbal adject. XXV III. 3 XI 11 XVIII, 2 Why . . . VII. 7 „ XXVII. i Will . . . X. I Participle past. II. 4 Words, more or Passive form in- less important XXX. 2 A FEW WORDS WHICH THE STUDENT IS REQUESTED TO READ When there are so many grammars on the German language already existing, and among the number, some, no doubt, very excellent, it may be justly asked, what occasion can there be for a new one? What advantages can this new work hold out, that are not already known aud contained in other works of a similar kind ? To these very just remarks, it must be observed iu the first place, that the attainment of a foreign tongue can only be the result, either of a long residence in the coun- try, or of a close application to its theory, that is — Grammar. Now it is quite certain that tue number of those who wish to acquire it by the latter method, by far exceeds the former; aud that this number is still en- creasing, in proportion as German literature and German scenery become more familiar to the English eye. It is natural too that among so great a variety of students . there should also be a variety of motives, which make the attainment of the language desirable. And perhaps travellers may form the greatest number among these. Yet , however excellent , all former grammars are , still the author is not aware, that, except in books of dia- logue, any one attempted a work of this kind, which, in the course of two or three months will supply a fo- reigner with most of the phrases, required on (he road, aud by the introductory reading - lessons , enable him to pronounce with tolerable precision. In the second place , after having most carefully looked over most Grammars of repute, the same difficulties, and indeed of which foreigners have always complained, presented themselves in them all. These are firstly, the want of a clear system of De- clensions. This has now been obtained by bringing all substantives under five declensions, two of which are appropriated indifferently to masculine and neuter nouns; and of the other three, one to mas., one exclusively to the f< m. and one to neuter nouns. The reason, why the same method has not been followed before, is not xery ob- vious. Perhaps it may have been argued, that there would be too many exceptions to each declension ; but we must allow, that to commit them to memory, would by far be preferable to continual uncertainty. Nor will they be found to be so very numerous, when the learner is told, that out of the many thousand radical words, only about one hundred and fifty in all , are excluded from their respective declensions; viz. , 42 in Decl. I.; 46 in Decl. II. ; 8 in Decl. HI. 5 13 in Decl. IV. and 35 in Decl. V. Many words may have escaped the scrutiny of the present work; but it so, their number cannot be very great. The next difficulty consists in the vague manner in which the theory on the change of vowel for the plural number, is given. The Table P. 25, where the student's memory finds an unerring guide in ascertaining the de- clension of any noun, — provided he is master of, or refers to the exceptions above alluded to — exhibits on the last line the declension in which, or not, such a change takes place, and refers for the exceptions, — which amount not in all to one hundred — to the Ap- pendix. The compound and neuter verbs have hitherto also pre- sented considerable difficulty; the former, by the com- plicated manner in which they have for the most part been defined; the latter, by the multiplicity of superfluous rules , invariably extracted from original German Gram- mars for the use of Germans. They will be found simpli- fied^ and divested of all unnecessary exuberance. The greatest difficulties, being thus cleared away, in the etymological -part of the Grammar, the student will soon be enabled to enter upon the practical part; which in this work begins with the auxiliary verbs. In this part, it has been endeavoured to make the syntax emanate from the sentence ; aud not , as has been the general practice, to learn to form a sentence by means of the syntax. The following reasons, will sufficiently explain the mo- tive. Abstract rules are no sooner acquired than forgot- ten. Moreover , persons of a maturer age , who do not make language the studj- of their lives, seldom continue, with the reminiscences of their school-days such assci- ations as, Substantive or Adjective sentences; Facta- tive , Principal, Subordinate or Tensitive Relations etc., besides numerous expressions , altogether foreign to Eng- lish Grammar. In the course of the 120 pages of exercises in this Grammar, phrases of almost every turn of dialogue occur, which an English person , acquainted with the etymolo- gical part of the work, is supposed to be desirous of turning into German: he knows the individual words, but not how to form them into periods and sentences. This practical part, is his German companion , indicating to him not only the order of words , but stating also the reason, why and wherefore, whenever the English Idiom requires to be corrected by the German. And these intimations, which are respectively referred to, as often, as similar emergencies present themselves , are given in marginal notes, in as plain aud comprehensive terms, as will make them intelligible to persons even , who have long resigned the study of Grammar, and will in the sequel be found equivalent to a well-digested system of syntax, with the only difference, that probably such rules only occur most frequently, as will be most required in discourse. The Promiscuous Exercises, consisting of some historical extracts , prove to the author's satisfaction , and will no doubt also to the student's, that the principles deduced from casual sentences and collected into marginal notes, answer every purpose of syntax; and will sufficiently familiarize him with German Idiom, so as to be enabled, with a tolerable share of application, to express himself, if not in an elegant, at any rate in an intelligible mauner. Those who use this grammar for self- instruction are earnestly solicited not to proceed to a second exercise before they are thoroughly acquainted with the first and the rules attached to it ; nor to be daunted by the con- tinual trouble of referring to former rules. A close at- tention to this will insure success; for during the course of publication of the present work, the author has had frequent opportunity of teaching his native tongue to English, who have made a temporary stay in this city, according to the system herein contained, and with uni- form success. It might have been useful to add some exercises on the etymological part of the grammar; but this would have swelled it to an inconvenient size; it is however contemplated shortly to publish a small seperate volume of such exercises. The author concludes this short explanatory introduction with the usual phrase „of hoping for the indulgence of the public", which may not be altogether denied him when he candidly avows , that the principal motive which urged him to the publication of the present labo- rious, though imperfect work, has been an ardent desire of becoming, if possible, even in a slight degree, useful to a Nation for whom he entertains the highest admiration. CARLSRUHE May 1841. INTRODUCTION TO GERMAN READING. 3 left ©9, g y) gay 53 n #ay. 1) 6, h f) hah 53 55 //arbour. 3 i, i n ee •5 * bless. 3 i, J n yot n -5 2/acht. « l, k w kah n >3 hookah. 8 I, 1 | I 9K m , m near ly the same as in English. 91 n, n 1 o, •• oh like in so. 33 V, P pay •• •• pain. D q, q w kooh 73 cool. 91 r, r 73 err 55 75 e/Tor. © f, s 15 ess 5? 75 £ssay. 8, s : final -5 55 55 gas. If, ss belonging to two syl . pronounce: ess-ess B, sz or final double i 5 , esstset. a t, t pronounce lay ] like in tail. U u, u 55 00 55 53 br?/te. 0? », V 55 fou 55 53 found. 2Bn\ w 55 vai 53 55 rail. £ r, X 55 iks v 75 Styx. g) v, y 75 ipsillon w ^cleped. 3 5, z 55 tset I IXTRODUCT. TO GERM. READIXG. Note. The Yot (J or I consonant) has in German in- variably the character of the English Y; the German for Ionic is Sonifd) ; pronounced: punish ; 3a (pah), pes ; Sutoel (yuvaiV) , jewel. The Fun (V) except in foreign words has always the sound of the letter F. Vay OO that of the English V; it has never the sound of the English W. Pronounce fcft like sh in English; and in !pf each letter seperately. (Bp and ft like shp and sht at the beginning of a word; also after prefixes, as aufftefaert (oufshtaihen) to get up j auf up, ftet)en stand; but at the end of the word they are pronounced as in English. Note. This rule of the pronunciation of the letter 8 has been laid down, as being practised bp the majority of the German People '; in the northern parts of Ger- many however f!p and ft are pronounced as in English. £f) has simply the sound of t. The vowels from certain grammatical rules, as will be seen hereafter, are often changed into diph- thongs ? which is indicated in the printed text by a small e or two dots over them, in writing by this mark " ; but if the word which begins with a diph- thong is to be written with a capital, the diphthongal mark (e) is placed next to it. Guttural sounds. The (Sij if in the same syllable it precedes or fol- lows a , , U is pronounced hard as in the Scotch word Yjochj — but before and after e, i and the diphthongs, it has the soft sound somewhat like the first part of the word MilcA-cow. TABLE OF VOWELS. TABLE of simple and diphthongal vowels referred to by figures in the Exercises of German Reading. pronounce like the i i 1. a . . . in£ag(day). . . .English a in art 2. a ... 5 5 9tacf)t (night) . . 3. Sle, \ » SSar(bear) . . . 4 4 4. 9(eu,aa » 93 aume (trees) . 5 5 5. Sit, aty » ^atfer (emperor) 6 6 6. 8(u , au 5? grew (woman) i 1. e ... ->-) te ein these and the ^ steam-power made that we as an of voice, which distinguishes one syl. more than the others in the same word. In words of German origin the accent almost invariably is laid on the vowel in the root syllable ; as: ©eben, to give; id) flebe; I give, gqjeben, given. Also in derivatives, as: ©dbe, gift; 33erflebitn$, forgiveness. In compound words the stress is laid on the defining word, as: meg'geben, to give away, nddjgebeti, to yield; Sttfuer- mann,steersmann; jDdmpfboot, steamboat ;^ttU0tf)ure, street- door, ®iXXtent)au$tfyuxe , gardenhousedoor (door to summer- house). Derivatives in ei and foreign words have the ac- cent on the last syl., as: SBieltoetbem, polygamy; &oU bdt, soldier. * Vide 1. gen. R. decl. of subs. ** The different print shows that the particle ttttf be- longs to the verb fpamttetl wh. makes in the infin. cmffipatk nen (to stretch up) , extend , unfurl. The same distinction is observed with other seperated compound verbs. 6 GERMAN HEADING. 1 2 3 4 5 6 12 3 t art, dart, bad, m o ist, wide, now, bet, there, height, moist. 1 spfetl bafyin flogen. 3d) blieb x 3:ag nnb 5 9^act)t arrow along flew. I remained day and e night 6 1 11 121 13121 31 1 anf bem x SRerbecf , n>elct)em allein ic^ jufdjretbe, baf* on the deck to which alone I ascribe that 1212 22 2 121 11 11 1 id) nicbt feefranf warb. SBir fatten gute 5 ©efetlfcfyaft, I not sea-sick got. We had good company l2i 121 1 21 1121 worunter befonberg fe|r t>iele 5 :Damentt)aren, among which particularly very many ladies were 2 11311 11 311 11 * * unb nact) einer fef)r fci)netfen 5 Ueberfaf)rtkam*n roixixt and after a very quick passage arrived we in l 11 12 11 2 bem stjpafen ju Diotterbam an. the harbour at Exercise III. 2)a e« fe£)r [pat war, al8 ttir in biefer 5 ar balb be- * butter-bread bring. Mv meal was soon en- 212 12 16 3 111 enbtgt unb t* Hep mid) axvj mein 3 ©djlafjimmet ded and I let me on my sleeping-room 8 GEKMAN HEADING. J 23 4 56123 4 art, dart, bad, mo ist, wide, now. bet, there, height, moist. 3 1 12211112 1 ci 2 1 1 2 fufyren. 3^ unterfucfyte bie 2 33etttikfyer, ob fie conduct. I examined the bed-sheets whether they 1 42 31 12111 11111 2 ntcl)t feudjt ttwren. 3d) fagte bem 3 3Mner efye er ba3 not damp were. I said to the waiter before he the 1 112 21 212 21 32 3 3immer ^erltep : (affen ©ie mid) morgen practe room left let you me to morrow precisely 23 1 ll2 1121 6 balb fiittf 5 Ubr wed en unb fc^icfcn ©ie ben x |>au^ half five clock* wake** and send you the house- 12 2 2 1^2 3 1 fttecbt um §alb fecfy3 urn tnetn 2 @e^ man-servant f about half six in order to my lug- 3 6 2 3112 1211 pacf auf bag r^eimfdbe 2 2)ampffdnff jubrmgen. gage on(board) the Rhenish ^ steam-vessel to bring. Exercise V. 1 1 k 1 2 1 11 2 $or fecfy6 5 U()r war icf) anbern 3 9ttot> Before six (V) clock was I other (the next) mor- I 21 6 1 112 311 1 genS ttieber auf bem 2 Sdf)iffe unb einige S $)IU ning again on (board) the e ship and some mi- II 111 4112 21 2 II mtten nacl) feeing lautete bie 5 ©lotfe gum britten nutes after six rang the bell to (for) the third * i. e. half p. four. ** be called up. •J* boots. GERMAN KEADIXG. 9 1 2 1 2 3 12 3 1 2 bliss, chief, open, uot,her. brute^puss.dur. L och, m ilc h-cow . i o """* u cli 9M , ber x ©o^Mn gab ba3 3 3et*en, unb ber xXampf, time^ the captain gave' the signal and the steam 1 111121 6 1 22 1 ber bigger ungebulbtg ctu§ bem , U^UQ^Moi)x which till now impatiently from the e escape-pipe jifdjte unb brauSte waxb nun auf tie hissed and blustered became (was) now upon the > 3 1 121 2 3 J ! JEriebtfyeile gelaffen bie 2 9tciber driving - (engine) parts let (directed) ; the wheels 11 12 1 122 2 2 21 fefiten fidj in 5 23etregung unb fcatb fatten set (put) themselves in motion and soon had J 2 2 1 2 J 11 2 ttrir bie 5 ©tabt mtt ibrer 5 9Renge son we the ^ city with her multitude (numerous) (of) 2 3 I T I 2 12 4 1 5 Sugbrutfen butter wt§. 3d? freute drawbridges behind us. I rejoiced (anticipated) mid? tat , ©etfte auf bie fcfionett s Drbeutgegenben (me) in ^mind (on) the beautiful Rhine-environs 2 T T T 2 1 3 T benen nrir entgegen eiltett. (countries) (to) which we towards hastened. Exercise VI. 3 l 3 1 3 i 1 3 I 2 r t (Sitter nteiner 4 9?eifegefal)rtett fagte ttttr One of my travelling-companions told (to) me 3 3 3 2 I 2 2 T 3 T T II bean <>%xuf)ftM, bay id) nod) etnige , 2age at (to the) e breakfast that I yet (for) some day* 10 GERMAN READING. 1 2 3 4 5 6 12 3 4 art, dart , bad, moi st , wide, n ow, bet, there, height, moist. 6 2r 31 1 1 2 r 1 1 2 1 31 2 2 auf btefe fci)6nen 5 2(nftd)ten serjicfyten miiffe ; baf* tie on these fine views renounce must that the 2 T I 3 2 1112 3 l 5 ©egenb crft bet SBonn intereffant wiirbe. environ (country) only near Bonn interesting be- 7 1 T 2 2 3ti ber 5 %fyat wax bie came (began to be). In (to the) deed was the 31 2 2 31 I 11 3 311212 5 sfteife fefyv langweiltg bis nad) Soln. £>citte id) nid)t journey very tedious till (to) Cologne. Had I not 2 2 . T 2 T 11 2 2l i 311 fet>r angenefyme 5 ©efeilfcfyaft unter ben 4 9teifenbett very agreeable company among (to) the travellers l 2 i l 3 T 12 12 gefimben, fo tintrbe td) mid) found so .would (should) I me (myself) fefyr gelangnmlt fyabetu 3d) fd)U$ mid) einigen very wearied have. I joined (me) some 4 1 11 2 111 22 beuifefyen x^erren unb 5 3)amen cm, bie fefyt German e gentlemen and ladies. whoverv 1 11 112 4 1 1 gut 4 ($nglifdj fprad)en unb aufjerfi ge- good (well) English spoke and extremely ob- fatltg tt)aren. Exercise VII. liging were. 3d) tterbanfe iljnen bie erfte 5 ^enntntj? I thank (owe ) (to) them the first e knowledge GERMAN READING. 11 1 '11 2 3 12 3 1 2 bliss, chief, open, not, her, brute, puss, dur. Loch, m il ch-c ow. i^" o n cli ber beutfdjert s ©pradje , ba fie mtv tie ntctften of the German language as they tome (the) most 5 Pjrafett, bie am 4 £auftgften auf 5 Sttu phrases which (on to the) most frequently on jour- fen t>ovfommen, tn'g 4 Seutfdbe uberfe^ten, fte in neys occur in (the) German translated, them in 3 TTT2 3S 2 * 2T2 r2 rnetn 3 (grimterungsfcucblein ttieberfdmeben nnbmicf) my remembrance book little * down wrote and me TT 6 TIF TTT 2T2T 2 in ber s 3(u3fpracfie berfelben unterttriefett. 3)ie in the pronunciation of the same instructed. The 1T2TT 2T 3T 3T6 5 3)amen fotmtett ttidjt umtyin fiber meine 5 2(u^ ladies could not about ** over (at) my pronun- TTT T 3 7T22T 3 T T fpradje bee (§f) ein n)enig ^u lacfcen, tt>etl id^ an- ciation of the Ch a little to laugh ^ because I in 2 2r 6TT23 IT fangS biefen , Saut immer mie ein $ fyer&or* the beginning this sound always like a K produced. 2TT 2 31 21 2 T T 2 3 7 2 T2 bradjte. 9Zac^ einem furjctt 2 Unterricfu fibetttxmb icfy After (to) a short instruction conquered I 2 2 3 2 T 2 T 3 bie nur fcfteinbate 5 (Sdninerigfeit. the but seeming difficulty. * Memorandum -book. ** Could not help. 12 GERMAN READING. J 2 3 4 5 12 3 4 art, dart, bad, moist, wide, now. bet, there, height, moist. a e Exercise VIII. 1 3 1*2 2t 2ll T 11 ' SBenn ncimlid) btefem 4 £>oppelbuc()ftaben in ber^ If namely (to) this double-letter in the 11 1 1 3 2 1 11 2 felben 5 irb c8 tt)ie $ same syllable an s follows then (becomes it*) like K 6 1 2 1 1 2 2 3 2 1 2 A auSgefprocfyen , wie j. 33, ($um 2 33eifpie() in: ttwdjfVn, pronounced as for e instance in to grow 11 1 2 1 2 1 3 * m*d)|>Ut, ber x Wud)*, f*dj* , ifcf. tt). (unb fo weiter). to change, the growth six and so forth. 2 Sll 1 6 1 2 1 11322 5>te beiben anbcrn x Saute biefer 5 £onbejeidmung The both other sounds of this utterance mark (of) 11 2 2 ' 1 1 2 1 2 (cfj) Herbert nacfy ifjren 5 Seftimmungen am ch are according to their definition at the 1 T 1 2'22l 2l 12 6 (Stibe be§ 4 SfX^doetS in bicfem . 2 33udj auf end of the * alphabet in (to) this book (on) in 2ll 3ll ,J 2T 2 2l folgenbe 5 2Beife f)ert>orgebrarf)t : man lege (the) following manner produced (let) one lay 2 2*216 22ll 2|-l2 2 fre 5 3wnge ffact) auf bie untere 5 liefer, fo bafi fie the tongue flat on the lower jaw so that she (it) 1 2 2 2 1 3 1 2 1 2 2 fief) an bie untern i3^ ne ruut) cinfd<cpt unb her (it) self on the lower teeth round attaches and * It must be. GERMAN READING. 1 3 1 2 1 2 3 12 3 1 2 bliss; chief, open, not, her. brute, puss, diir. Loch, milch-cow. ion eli 1 ! 2 2 3 1 3 1 1 12 A 2 A 3 1 6ringe bur* erne Heine 5 Sfttftrengung ber 5 $ef)(e emeu bring by a little exertion of the throat a 2 1 1 g 1 6 11 oil 3 1 gurgeluben, rauften x ?aut f)en>or, ttie in ben>2Bortem: gxirfflinff hoarse sound forth as in the words ol 2 J o J J 3 2* 6 1 ad) r nad), 1 Baud). 2)er W>eidbe 2 ?aut be3 (Sty ah (yet, still) smoke. The soft sound of the ch 1 2 1 1 I 2 1 2 1 A 2 2 2 Ijtngegen tx>irb Ijerfcorgcbracfyt mbem man btc on the contrary is produced while one the 2 l22i 6 122 1 11 g 3 l ^ n g^ ftod) an ^ en 3 ©ciumcn legt unb 'Ocn 3 2(tbem tongue flat on the palate lays and the breath 6 21 211, 6 12 21 cutf biefem iSBege jttrifcfyert 3 ©airmen unb 5 3unge on (in) this way between palate and tongue 3 1 221 2 3 2112 letfe fcurcf) ben 1 5D?imb treitu , nne in: id), softly through the mouth drives (forces) as in I ? utd)t, 2 ?Ud)t, f*ud)t. not p right damp. Exercise IX. 6 1 T 1 1 2 2 2 I 1 Shtcfc bemerfte id), bap urn gut vex* Also observed I that in order good (well) un- 1 1 2 2 L 22 3 ftanben $u werben, man ba$ 9t rein derstood to become (be) one the R clear (plain) 6 121 312 12 21 1 112 1 ausfprecften muffe unb iticfit one im 4 (Sngltfc^en am x S(n- pronounce must and not as in English in the 14 ARTICLES. I 3 1 2 1 3 1 1 6 2 1 fang eineg 2 3BorteS, eine 5 9lrt ^ant vote U beginning of a word a kind (of) sound like u 21 1 11 o 1 2 A 23 3 unb in ber 5 Sftttte eineg 2 2£orteg ttne ein 6 and in the middle of a word like a (French eii) 2i 2 1X 2 3 2 ! j. 2 ba&or jufe§en, tote fyorbar nrirb wennman before it to put> as audible becomes (is) when one 2 1 1 T TT4T I ba6 engttfcbe Ring mit bem bentfcfjen x Btng the English (word) with the German (word) (a Ring) 2 1 2 T 3 2 xtnb: Word mit 2 Woxt aergletcfyt. and with (a word) compares. THE ARTICLES. The German language distinguishes the three different renders bv three different articles. DEFINITE ARTICLE. v Singula?. Plural Mas. Fern. Neut. for the three genders, Norn . ber bie bag bie the Gen. be§ ber beg ber of the Dat. bem ber bem ben to the Ace. ben bie bag bie the INDEFINITE ARTICLE. Mas. Fern. Neut. Nom. ein eine ein a Gen. eineg ciner eineg of a Dat. einem einer einem to a Ace. einen eine n\\ a GENDER OF SUBSTS. 15 SUBSTANTIVES. GENDER' OF SUBSTANTIVES. Of the masculine gender are: 1. All male names. 2. Names of winds, seasons , months and days. 3at)r, year, is neuter. 3. Names of stones. 4 Nouns ending in: cut, el x , en l , er \ ing (exc. 3)1110, thing, n.); and ling. Of the feminine gender are : 1. All female names 2 . 2. Names of fruits and flowers (exc. ber Sfyfel, apple). 3. Nouns ending in e except such as bear in them the undeniable attributes of masculine conspicuousness ; as: ber £oft)e, lion, 23ote, messenger. Jlnge, eye, (Snbe, end, @rbe, in- heritance, are neuter. 4. Those terminating in: ei * 3 , l)eit, fett, aft \ alt \ in 2 , acfyt *, fmft, nng 1 , ufy 1 , ur, uyt Of the neuter gender are : 1. The names of metals *, 2. of countries, towns and cities l . 3. Words showing repeated or uninterrupted action (reiteratives), as: ©eimtnmel, crowd- 1 For the exceptions see Appendix I — XVm. 2 The addition of in to a mas. appellative renders it of the fern, gender; to form the plural the terminating n must be doubled, as: greunb, m. friend, greimbm- female friend , greunbmnen, female friends. 3 This sound is sometimes represented by flj. 16 DRCL. OF SUBSTS. ing, swarming ; ©ftmtrmet , muttering ; @e- ferret, vociferation; (£^jtf#er 7 thunderstorm. 4. Nouns endiilg in cfyen rind" (Sin l (diminutives); ier, mfj \ fat, ifutm \ 5. All parts of speech when used .substantively, as: ba§ @ute, the good; bae SBenn unb bae Slber, the »/^and 6wf; fca^3a uttb^em, the y^s- and no; \o& (Sffett, eating (from effen, to eat); ba$ gc&ett, life (from leben, to live). Note. Some words hare two different genders when of two different significations ^ «S;jbagS3anfr T theribbj&n, and $h 93anb, the volume; a list of which will be found Appendix , fig. XIX. ', ^ DECLENSION OF "SUBSTANTIVES. Si& general rules. J . Compound words are declined, and form'their gen- der and plural after their last component ; ex. : tag £agefmdj[, diary , %a§ebn&%x, diaries, from lag, m. day, pi. £age-, and Q3ud), n. book, pi. ' 33ixcfyer ; ba3 *§ofntarfd)atiantt, /;£. ^ofmarfdjaUamter , being- com- pound of §i)f, 7/i. /?£. £i>fe, court; SDlarfc^aU , mar- shall or chamberlain-, pi. SDtorfdj&tfe , and 2Cmt, ??. office j pi. Siemter; lord chamberlain's office. 2. All nouns of the masculine and neuter gender have in the genitive case singular g or it. 3. Feminine nouns remain unaltered throughout the singular number. 4. Most nouns having in the singular a, or u, change these vowels into diphthongs for the plural number , ex.": \. ' This latter termination mostly occurs in antiquated, poetical or scriptural writings. DECLENSION I. 17 ter 33cttf), the brook, pi. 23&d)e, bte Sfi&mb, the wall, /?£. SOBcmbe, bag ga$, the barrel, /?£. gaffer. 5. The plural is formed by either adding e, er, en or n to the nominative singular ^ or as is the case with nouns of a certain description \ they admit of no other alteration in the plural than the changing of the vowel into a diphthong and ad- ding an n to the dative case only. But there is no occasion for this n if the noun singular terminates with that letter. 6. In accordance with these distinctions all nouns have been divided into five declensions. Note. Nouns, and words from other parts of speech used substantively , both in writing and printing must begin with capital letters. DECLENSION I. PLUR. c GEX. SING. 3. To this declension belong : 1. Most monosyllabic nouns of the mas. gender 2 , as: ©tanb, profession; <£)itt, hat; £tftf), table. 2. Words of the mas. and neut. gender beginning with : be, ge 2 , £er and not terminating in: e, en, er; as : bad ©enncfct, weight; ber SBegrtff, conception; ber QSerfncf), attempt. 3. Mas. and neut. nouns terminating in : ip, at 2 , aft, aft (not taft), idjt (not ftdjt), ter, or (not tor), 1 See decl. III. 2 For the exceptions see the Appendix XX. 2 18 DECLENSION I. as: bag $erf)altm£, proportion; ©eneral, general; ber 23atl, ball; ber spafaft, palace; ber £aMd)t/ hawk; Offtjier, officer in the army; Sftarmor, marble. 4. All masculine nouns in ling, as: ber Singling, youth, young man; 5lbfi>mnv ling, descendant. 5. Foreign words in Clin and those changed into an, as: Stapitain or ^a:pitan, captain; ^orjellan, china. Examples. Mas. Sing. Plur. Norn, ber 2Bein, the J bie SBeine, the i Gen. beSSBeineS 2 , ofthefg. ber 2Beine, ofthe(|. Dat. bent SBeine, to the 1% ben 28einen, to the/ g Ace. ben SBein, the ) bie Seine, the J Neut. Norn, bag ©efc^enf, the j bie ©efcfyenfe, the ^ Gen. beg ©efcfyenfeS, ofthefl ber ©efcfyenfe, ofthefi Dat. bem ©efcfyenfe, to the/ 1 ben ©efefyenfen, to the( | Ace. bag ©efefyenf, the J* bie ©efcfyenfe, the 2 The e is generally inserted in the genitive case of mas. and neut. nouns of this and the following declension; but in colloquial phrases it is mostly omitted; in some words particularly those terminating in g and § it is in- dispensable; in others, especially in polysyllabic words, it sounds stiff and formal. Practice and euphony, will here as in other similar cases form the truest guides. If however the genitive receives the e, the dative must have it also. DECLENSION II. 19 Mas, (change of vowel into diphthong). Sing. Plur. Norn, ber Stopf, the j bie Sfttyfe, the i Gen. beg Jlopfeg, oftheff ber ffityfe, of the (| Dat. bent $o:pfe, to the i?- benS&pfett, to the i g- Acc. ben Jtopf, the ) bie ®o!pfe, the V DECLENSION II. PLUR. er, GEN. SING. §. To this declension belong : 1. Most monosyl. nouns of the neuter gender * ; as: bag |)aug, house; bag 2)aci), roof; bag Spiel, the game. 2. Compound nouns of the neuter gender ending intfyum 2 as : bag ^Itertfyum, antiquity; bag (Stgen^ tf)um, property. Examples. Neuter. Sing. Plur. N. bag |ntl)tt, the j bie |)uf)ner jg» G. beg |>uf)neg 3 , of the f fowl, ber |nu)ner ( S- D. bem £ufyne, to the i chicken, ben |ntf)nern[ ^ A. bag |>ul)tt, the ] bie £itljner )? N. bag «jpersogil}nm, the ig-bie |)erjogtf)i'tmer f E ber G. beg |)er3ocjtt)umeg 3 , of the' g - ber $er$ogtl)umer (£ D. bem |)ersogtfyume, to thei s - ben ^erjogt^umerni T? © 2 A. bag |>erjogtf)nm, the j P bie |)er$ogtl)iimer ) ? 1 For the exceptions see the Appendix XXI. 2 Two substantives of this termination are masculine : ber Sfcetdjtijum, riches, ber Srrtfyum , error; but with the exception of the article they are declined as above. 3 See obs. 2 Decl. I. 2. 20 DECLENSION HI. DECLENSION III. PLUR. NO AFFIX i, GEN. SING *, To this declension belong : 1. All masculine and neuter nouns terminating in el 2 , em, en and er 2 , as: ber 93ogel, bird; ber Sltfyem, breath; ber gaben, thread; ber 93ater, father; bag 3^ mme ^/ room. 2. All neuter nouns beginning with ge 3 and end- ing in e 3 , as: bag ©efolge, suite; bag ©enrage, stamp^ die, impression. 3. Diminutives in cfyetl and tent, as: bag ^Httcfyen, the little hat; bag Sogetein, the little bird. Examples. Mas. Sing. N. ber |)tmmel, the G. beg £>tmmefg, of the D. bem |)immel, to the A. ben ^immel, the N. ber ©ruber, the G. beg Sruberg, of the D. bem 23ruber, to the A. ben SBrnber, the CD P < CD 3 O CD Plur. bie |)tmmel, the \^ ber |)tmme(, ofthef § ben |)tmmeln, to the( g bie |)immel, btc 93riiber, ber 93ruber, the the j o- of the f 3 benSriibern, to the [g bie 33riiber, the p Neut. N. bag Secfen, G. beg 23ecfeng, D. bem 23ecfen, A. tag 23etfen, the of the f p* to the ( g' the bie 33ecfen, ber 93ecfen, ben Secfen, bie 23edfen, the of the | to the( the 1 See Decl. of Substs. Rl. 5. - For the exceptions see the Appendix XXII. 3 Nouns of this class scarcely ever have any plural , since they properly belong to those denominated Reitera- tives (see Substantives, neut. gend. Rl. 3). DECLENSION" IV. 21 Neut. Sing, Plur. N. ba$ ©etretbe, the i none ; of the f § decl. see obs. 3 of this G. be$ ©etretbeS, D. bem ©etretbe, to the i = A. ba$ ©etretbe, the ] N. ba$ ©artdjett, the \\ bte©artcfcen, the \i G beg©art(fienS. ofthef - bertMrtdjett, ofthefjr D. bem©drtcf)en, to the i g ben ©artdjen, to the i | A. bag ©arisen, the J.f bie©drtcf)ett, the )| DECLENSION IV. PLUR. tt or en i: tEX. SING, n. To this declension belong : 1. All mas. nouns terminating in e 2 ; as : ber 26tt>e, lion; ber Sotfre, messenger. 2. Nouns raised from participles and adjectives and represented in the masculine gender ; as : ber ©cfangenc 3 , the captive; ber gecfrtenbe, the combattant; ber ©ute, the good man; ber ©ropte, the greatest man. 3. Mas. nouns derived from foreign and the ancient languages , ending in : ant, ab, at 2 , ent, et, tft, ta)t f tor; as: gabrtfant, manufacturer; Gamerab, comrade; Solbat, soldier; (gtttbent, student; ^Sro^et, pro- 1 Nouns ending in e require only an n to form their plural, but those in a consouant take en. 2 For the exceptions see the Appendix XXIII. 3 This class of words must not be mistaken for the neuter nouns beginning with $e and ending in e (Decl. III. Rl. 2). 22 DECLENSION V. phet; ©opfyift, sophister; gfcmtaft, fantastical per- son; Softer, doctor j physician. 4. Names of nations terminating in e or in a con- sonant having the accent; as: ber^ole, Polander; ber gxanjofe, Frenchman; bev ^ofacf, Cossac. Examples* Mas. Sing. Plur. N. ber $nabe, the , bie Sitaben, the J G. be^ ^nabett, ofthef ber ^naben, ofthef D. bent ^naben , to the( oy * bm tnaben, to the! oys ' A. ben Sfriabett, the 1 bie Sfrtaben, the ) N. ber Seutftye, the j^ bie Deutfcften, the Jq G. beS SSeutfeijen, ofthef? ber 3)eutfd)en, ofthef | D. bem 2)eutfcf)en, to thei § ben !l)eutfd)en, to thei p A. ben ®eutfd)en, the ) ? bie 2>eutfdjeri, the )■ N. ber (Slepfyant, the j © bie (§(e^anten, the , j£ G. be^ (?lepf)anten, ofthef^ ber ©epfyantert, of theNS D. bem (Slepljanten, to the( IT ben(§iepl)anten,to thei | A. ben (Sle^anten, the ) s* bie ©epfyanten, the J » DECLENSION V. PLUR. n or en », GEN. DAT. ACC. LIKE NOM. (TDECL. OF SUBSTS. RL. 3). To this declension belong : with few exceptions all nouns of the feminine gender 2 . 1 Feminine nouns terminating in e, el, ev, take n for their plur. , all other terminations en. 2 For the exceptions see the Appendix XXIV. SUBSTS. WITH DIFF. PLURALS. 23 Examples- Sing. Plur. N. bie ©fcracfye, the ]gr tie ©pvactyen, the ]g G. ber ©pracfye, of thefciq bcr ©prac^en, ofthefaj D. ber ©pracfye, to theLg ben ©pracfyen, tothei^ A. bie ©pracfye, the ]? bie ©pracfyen, the iS N. bie ©abet, the i bie ©abetn, the i G. ber ©abet, ofthef 3> ber ©abeln, ofthef©* D. ber ©abet, to thei r ben ©abeln, to thei f A. bie ©abet, the J bie ©abeln, the ] ' N. bie ©cfyftefter, the i bie ©cfynxftern, the 1 G. ber ©djwefter, ofthef |- ber ©droeftern, ofthef 5' D. ber ©cbmefter, to the/ « fc e n ©cfyweftern, to thei | V bie ©dm>eftern, the V A. bie ©cf)Wefter, the ) bie ©cini>eftern, the N, bk £ugenb, the j bie £ugenben, the K G. ber £ugenb, ofthef^- ber £ugenben, ofthef ji D. ber £ngenb, to the i g ben Sugenben, to the i S A. bie Sitgenb, the ) bie £ngenben, the J* SUBSTANTIVES WITH DIFFERENT PLURALS. The following- nouns change their plural with their signification : Note. Those marked with an asterisk have also dif- ferent genders, see the Append, XIX. ber Stepeft, pi. 2lspefte, views; St^peften, appear- ances (of times etc.). * 33anb w SSdnber, ribbons; 33anbe, ties (of af- fection), also fetters ; 33 an be, volumes. bie 33anf, » Sanfe, benches; 33anfen, banking- establishments. - Saner » 33awer, cages: Saueni, peasants. 24 SUBSTS. WITH DIFF. PLURALS. ber SSogeu, pi. 33ogen, sheets (of paper); 336gen, arches. ba6 @a:pita{, » (Sapttale and (Sajntaler, capitals, in architecture ; (Sajntaften , capitals (funds). * (Sfyor n (§f)ore, choirs ; (Styore, choruses. bag 2)tng, » SDinge, things; dinger, expression of contempt. ber gu£, ?3 §ufie, feet; gujjc, feet, in measure- ment. baS @eftcf)t, w ©ejtdjter, faces; ©eftcfyte, visions. ba$ .jporn, *> Corner, horns; «£x>rne, various de- scriptions of horns. ber Sabett, » Saben, shutters; Saben, shops. ba8 Sidjt, w Sifter, lights; 2td)te, candles. ber SRatm, w SRanner, men; SJicmnen, vassals. * Sftenfdj, » 9ftenfdjett, men; 9tcnf^er, depraved females j wenches. * SDftofyr, » SJtoftren, negroes; SRotyre, moors ; marshes (more commonly 9)i00v). ba6 Otofyr, » Secure, tubes, canes; 9tol)re, kinds of canes. bte ©cm, w ©due, sows; ©auen, wild boars. * ©cfcilb, w ©cMlbe, shields; ©djilber, signboards. * ©ftft, » ©ttfte, pegs; ©ttfter, ecclesiastical foundations. ber ©traup, « ©traufic, nosegays; ©trance, ostriches. * £f)or, ?3 Sljore, gates; Xfyorert, fools. ba6 Sttdj, 53 £ittf)er, cloths; £udje, kinds of cloth. ba§ SBort, w SBorter, words; SBortc, words, when put together to form a sentence. ber 3<>ft, " 3ol(e, tolls, duties; ^olic, inches. TABLE OF DECLS. OF SUBSTS. 2o DO 9 > § 9 •/» as <■§ F- O ° s ST ■ X 4) Q 1 i > -. 3 1 I ! 1 ! ! 1 ! less d S a ^ z i: < k ! 1 j> "S 3 ■ 5 ° ~ O '~> o S 2 g S 2 1* 1 1 i •* ° 1 ° ° — *o d ^ " ! 11-1 * > a £ c fc SB 35 Z 1 - 38^1 WW | }-► s-» J_> }_► '—> '-* Ch> <-» < 1g Z* s 7"! BE d ~ $ g .2 '5 ---si — o o r: i o o o o SH = a < E = 1 BE 1. — BE 5 £ =£ a .5 Ji •S3 S i = = ^2 c5 © S H o Z ^5 - < - • o PS 6.= *- 26 DECL. OF PliOPKH NAME*. DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES. 1. The inflection of proper names principally oc- curs in the genetive sing, when they take an '8 to mark this case^ excepting those in 3, £, fd), X, 5 and the feminine terminations a 1 and e, which take en3. Of course those in e require n3 only. 2. Since however they are frequently met with declined throughout^ both in the sing, and plur. the different forms of their declensions are set down here. I. Without article. Singular j mas. N. £arl £I)eobor ftrartj $o£ . £atfer 2 G. StaxVS £f)eobor'3 granjenS 93o£eng £atfer'g D. Sarin £fyeoborn granjcn $o£en jailer n A. Sarin £l)eoborn granjcn SBofieit pattern 1 Much in the decl. of proper names is left to taste and euphony as may be inferred from the dec!, of glora and (fmmct. Modern mas. names of persons in a, o, i Cpofa, ^eftalo^i, Slntonio) admit but seldom of any other change than the gen. '$; some of the ancient however an $ in the gen. sing, and ne in the nom. plur., as: (Sicero, (Sice* xo'$, (Sicero etc., pi. (Stcerone etc. Some few scriptural, classical and other proper names, are met with declined in their Latin or Greek form 5 as: bte ©eburi (Sfyriftt, birth of Christ; bte ($pi)td $auli cm £ttum; *P$abu gabeln, Paul's Epistle to Titus, Phaedrus' fables. 2 el, en, er follow this form. DECL. OF PROPER NAMES. 27 Plural^ mas. N. ®axU £f)eobore granje 93o£e jailer G. £arle S'ljeobore granfc 93ope fatter D. far! en £t)eoboren gran? en $open fatter n A. 5?arle £f)eobore gran? e 9Sop e fatter Singular j fern. N. Slbe^eit S-ittfe glora Smttta G. Sfbelfiett^ Suife ng gflor en§ (Smma '8 D. 2lbe0)ctten Sutfe n gtor en (Smma 'n A. Stbeltyeit en Suifett gloren Plural^ fern. (Smma 'n N. Stbeifjeit e Strife n glor en (gtntna 'n G. 2lbelf)ette Strife n glor en (§mtna 'n D, SEbel^eft.en Strife n glor en (Smma 'n A. ^bel^eite Sutfe n glor en (gmma 'n II a With the article. 1. The singular remains undeclined. 2. The plural as above. 3. If instead of the article the possessive pro- noun stands before the proper name^ or that a modifying word follow the article, it takes the genetive $ , as : UnferS ©djitterS ©ebidjte, the poems of our Schiller. 2)er ©etft bee gropen griebertdbS , the mind of Frederic the great. If the article follow immediately the proper name it sounds better without the gen. $ t as: grtebrtcft be£ ©ropen SSorfa^ren, the ances- tors of Frederic the great. 28 DELL. OF ADJS. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES 1. The German adjective, if intended to express the quality of a substantive (i. e. used attribu- tively} agrees with it in gender , number and case ; adding et for the nom. mas. , e for the fern., and eg for the neut.; as: gutev Mann, gute grau, gitteS 5?inb. aood man woman child. One or more adjectives may stand before a substantive ; if one only, it is declined after the first part of Decl. I.; if more than one, the first adj. only is inflected after the first and the others after the second part. DECLENSION I. Sing. M. F. N. N. er G. en D, em J A. en er en en en -er e en en e — — er — — e Plur. for the three genders. N. e en G. er en —eg — en — em eg en en eg D. A. -en ( en -e i en 3. The following determinatives and conjunctives: em (indef. art.), fein no 2 , iriel much 2 , tr»enig little 2 , mefyr more 2 , mcmcf) some 2 , the personal prons. id), 1 Adjs. terminating in m make their dat. sing, in n, as: wilt cmgeneljmcn ©eftdjt, with agreeable countenance. 2 After these words as well as after : cmbere , cuttle , DECL. OF ADJS. 29 btt etc. the poss. proas, mem, beirt etc. cause the adj. to be declined after the second part of this decl. Ex.: Qin reicfrer Wtaxm, a rich man. defiled gropen UnterneljmenS , of no great en- terprise. 3d) fro her 9Renfd& / I happy man. Xix cut fm erf (a men (Scfyuler, to the attentive scholar. Ungeacfctet mtferer gropen ©emulnmgen, not- withstanding our great endeavours. DECLENSION II. 1. If one or more adjectives are preceded by a determinative or conjunctive ending in er, it, a3, t, e$ such as the def. art. ber 3 , bte, ba3; the de- monstrative pronoun biefer, — e, — e3 (this); jener, — e, — c§ (that); the rel. pron. weldjer, — e, — eg (who, which ; what), and some indef. prons. ; as : jeber, jegltcfyer (each), mancfeer (many a one) etc. they are declined as follows : Sing. PL for the three gend. M. F. N. N. — — e e -e en ■: G. -en -en -en — —en D. -en -en — — en -en A. -en e -e en ^.. etttdje, melitere, atfe, foldje, toel^e (some, not in the sense of ivhicIQj it is more usual to make the pi. of adjs. in e than en, 3 Also the demonstrative pron. formed of the def. art. by the addition of jenig, as: berjemge, biejentge, baajeuige, he j she, that (followed by who or which). 30 DKCL. OF ADJS. 2. The adjective that stands to define another, is used adverbially and cannot be declined ; as : (Sin butlfelgruner S^ocf , a dark green coat. (Sine fcMedjt bclofjnte £>aublung, an action ill re- warded. By declining the first adj. in the last ex. the sense is quite altered, for (Sine fdblecfcte belofynte |)anbhmg means, a bad action that is rewarded. 3. If the adj. follows a verb after a subst. or pro- noun, or that the verb be understood though not expressed, it is no longer an attribute but a predicate and is not declined ; ex. : 3)tefe3 ^tnb lieSt gut, jetteS fdjretbt gut, this child reads well, that writes well. Siefe gran ift ftol}, this woman is proud; aber jenc \\i nicf)t fiolj, but that one is not proud. 2)tefe grau fiolj? ba^^inb gut? where the verb to be or to call is understood : you call that woman, that child etc., you say that woman, that child is etc. 4. If however the adjective refers to a subst. ex- pressed or understood, it agrees with it; in Eng- lish this reference is generally represented by 55 one u, pi. 55 ones « ; ex. : 3cfy fyabe fcfmw;e spferbe, mem SBruber formate, I have black horses, my brother bay ones. |)eute faufe id) beutfdje Sucfyer, morgen englifcfje, to day I buy German books, to morrow English ones. 5. Adjectives raised into substantives are declined according toR. 1 in this declension, correspond- ing with Decl. IV. of substs., R. 2. However if DECL. OF ADJS. 31 qualified as in R. 3 Decl. I. of adjs. they follow that declension, ex.: (Sin SBeifer, ber SHJeifc ©rtedbenlanbS , a wise man of Greece > the wise man etc. 6. Adjective nouns ending in er formed from names of places are undeclined if used as attributes , as : em SBerlhter Sanfmantl , a merchant of Berlin , eine6 Berliner etc. ein SSStener ^ lazier, a piano-forte from Vienna, eineg SBtener etc. If however they stand alone they are declined after Decl. III. of substs. Examples on the declension of adjectives. Decl. I. Part. I. Sing. M. F. X. N. cjuter Setter, gute SRutter, guteS $inb, good G. guten 93ater$, guter SJhttter, guten ftfttbed, of good D. gutem^ater guter SKutter, guten^Sinbe, to good A. guten 93ater, gute Gutter, guteS Siuib, good father. mother. child. Plur. 4 N. gute SBater, gute Gutter, gute Sinber, good G. guter SSdter, guter SKittter, guter Stnber, of good D. guten Satern, guten bittern, guten&inbern, to good A. gute 93dter, gute 9Jftttter, gute Sinber, good fathers. mothers. children. 4 Adjs. do not change the vowel into diphthongs for the plur. like substs. though they require a change of rowel for other purposes ^ especially in derivatives, as from, gut, gittig, kind; jott (tender), jdtiitdj, tenderly; 35or= 32 DKCL. OF ADJS. Declension I. Part. 1 and 2. Sing, M. F. N. alter rotfter SBetn, fiifk retfe grucfyt, G. alten rotten 28eme3, fitter reifett grucfyt, D. altem rotten SBeine, fitter retfen grudfyt, A. alten rotten 28em, fu£e retfe grucfyt (old red wine, of , to etc.) (sweet ripe fruity of, to etc.) N. N. femes blaueS £ud(j, G. feinett blauen %u$)t$ f D. fetnem blauen £ucfye, A. fetneg blaueg %u&). (fine blue cloth y of, to etc.) Plur. M. F. N. afte rotten SBeine, fiifie reifett $rud)te, G. alter rotten SBetne, fitter retfen grucfyte, D. alten rotten 25etnen, fitfjen reifen griicfyten, A. alte rotten 2Beme, fitf?e retfen gritdjte. (old red wines etc.) (sweet ripe fruits etc.) N. N. feme blauen £itcf)er, G. feiner blauen £ittf)er, D. fetnen blauen JEudjertt, A. fettie blauen Satdfyer. (fine blue cloths etc.) rati) (store), ttorratfyicj, ready; flad) Ceven, smooth), DBer- ftadfje, superficies, oberflldd^ttdC; f superficially; grofi, great, 9te£ev, greater. DECIi. OF ADJS. 33 Declension II. Sing. M. F. N. ber fd)6nc £ag, bie eble 5 £tjat, G. be^ [crimen £age3, ber eblen Zhat, D. bent fdjonen £age, ber eblen £l)at, A. ben fcfyonen £ag, bie eble £l)at. (the fine day, of the, etc.) (the noble deed, of the, etc.) N. N. ba6 grof?e 3 tenter, G. be3 grc^en 3temer8, D. bem grofjen 3temer, A. ba£ gro£e 3temer. (the large room, of the, etc.) Plur. M. F. N. bte fcfyonen £age, bte eblen £l)aten, G. ber [gotten Sage, ber eblen Styaten, D. ben febonen £agen, ben eblen Zljakn, A. bte fcfyonen £age, bte eblen £baten. (the fine days, of the etc.) (the noble deeds, of the etc.) N. N. bte gropen 3 tenter, G. ber grofmt 3temer, D. ben gropen 3temern, A. bte gropen 3temer, (the large rooms, of the etc.) 5 This adj. is properly ebel, but adjs. terminating in el, er, as well as words from other parts of speech drop 34 COJMP. OF ADJS. COMPARISON OP ADJECTIVES. 1. The positive degree of the German adj. is either its adverbial form as found in the dictionary, or varied according to its agreement with the noun with which it stands. The conjunctions of this degree: as — as, must be rendered in German by: fo — ate and some- times by: &m l fo — ate; ex: dx ift fo retd) ate fein Setter, he is as rich as his cousin. 3d) bin eben fo gebulbig ate Ste, I am as pa- tient as you. 2, The comparative is made by the addition of er or r and the changing 2 of the vowels a, o, U into diphthongs, and is used as predicate or at- tribute, ex: ftarf, ftarfer, strong, stronger; leife, letfer, softly, more softly. („Than" is expressed by ate.) @r ift ftdvler ate fern 33ruber, he is stronger than his brother. (§m ftcirferer SDkntt ate fein Sruber, a stronger man than his brother. Seine ^anblungen ftnb ebler 3 ate feine 33er* this e when the accession of another becomes necessary by inflection. This rule however cannot be said to be general _, much being- left to the ear. 1 ^Equally" being sometimes expressed but mostly understood in English. 2 This change can only take place in radical adjs. a few excepted; see the Appdx. XXIX. 3 Vide Decl. of Adjs. obs. 5. which is also to be ob- served with adjs. in the comparative degree. COMP. OF ADJS. 35 fpred)ltngen, his actions are nobler than his professions. (Sine cblerc £)anbhmg, a more noble action. Qx fprtdjt leifer aU feme Sdjtt>ejier, he talks more softly than his sister. din leifere§ 2Bort, a word more softly spoken. 3. Comparatives not made purely between substan- tives, but showing an object to partake more of one quality than another, must be rendered in German by m el) r, as : ©em Slnerbieten \\X mefjr prafy(ertfd) att grojj* muting , his offer is more ostentatious than generous. 4. The comparative preceded by „the" is rendered in German by je — je or je — befto, as: 3e ofter (£te fommen, befto angeneljuter nnrb e6 mix fetyltj the oftener you come, the more agreeable it will be to me. 3e meljr man ifyu iabelt, je UKntger fceffert er ftcfy, the more he is blamed, the less he mends. 5. The superlative, always used attributively 4 , is formed by the addition of ft or eft, as: <5k ift bte jiingfte £ocf)ter, she is the youngest daughter. 3)te fupefte $rud)t, the sweetest fruit. 6. Adjs. terminating in b, d), d, e, etxb, f, g, l(, m, IX, J), r mostly make their superlative in eft and alt others in ft. * Except in phrases like the following: id) liebe l>k$ am beften, I like this best; where am is sometimes translated in English by the. 3. 36 COM P. OF ADJS. 7. Adjs. ending in ifrf) do not well admit of a su- perlative; it would sound harsh to say: „@m aSoIf tm fnccf)ti(cf)ftett 3uftctnbe fyalten , to keep a people in the most servile condition " which is obviated by a circumlocution or the ad- dition of an adverb, as: unerfyort f nec£)ttfd) , t)6djft, aufierfi etc. (unheard of, utmost, extremely.) 8. Some adjs. form their comparative and super- lative irregularly ; some are defective and others can only be used as predicates or adverbs in the positive. The latter are marked with an asterisk ; they are as follows : Pos. Comp. Sup. - p 5 outer (wanting) dlt^erft outmost * balb soon efyer sooner et)eft soonest * gem fond of lieber rather liebft fondest gut good beffev better beft best , r 5 hind , (wanting) fyinterft hindmost * 1)0$) 6 high l)ot)er higher fyocfyft highest inner 5 inner (wanting) innerft inmost 5 This form of the posit, is made use of, and declined, rvherever the comp. is wanting; e, g. am aufeven (Jnbe ber ©tabt t^o^nen, to live at the farther end of the town; m ben inneven ©emacfjew, in the more interior chambers. 6 With the c dropped it is used as an attributive adj. as: fjwlje 23&ume, tyoJje Xfyitrme, high trees, high towers; but as a predicate it retains its adverbial form, as: bie SBaume fiub fyotf), bie £tyurme finb *)od), the trees etc. are high. Pos. (wanting) 7 nalje near ober * I upper * untett) , under uttter 5 I t>icl much , . fore sorter 5 ! C03IP. OF ADJS. Comp. mtttbet less ttafyer nearer (wanting) (wanting) mefyr more (wanting) 37 Sup, mtnbeft least ttadjft next oberft uppermost unterft undermost meift most ttorberft foremost 9. In the same manner the English language makes use of very and most, to express a higher degree of comparison and not unfrequently to strengthen the Superlative, the German makes use of aller 8 and f)otf)ft, the latter especially be- fore adjs. in lid), as : £)ocfyft erfreulidje -Wacfyricfcten, most pleasant ac- counts. (Sin I)dcf)ft traurfged (Srefgnff?, a most distressing occurrence. (§S ift ber allcrbeftc (Sinfatf, it is the rery best idea. 3)a3 2(tfergeringfte, ba3 @fc tbun fonnen, the very least you can do. Sometimes both are combined, as : 3)a3 atterborf)ftc ©ut ift Sufviebettfyett, *h e high- est of all possessions is contentment. ' SB'efitg or ffein little^ .are substituted for the/ms. These make also toetiiget: toemgjt, fkuucr Hemp. 8 ailev is properly the gen. pi. of aUc (all). 38 PENS. PRONOUNS. THE PRONOUNS. I. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. First person. Sing. N. trf), I G. metnev l 0>on mix) of me, of myself D. mix, to me, to myself A. mtcf), me, myself Plur. N. nnr, we G. unfer Qoon un8) of us, of ourselves D. un3, to us, to ourselves A. ung, us, ourselves Second }person. Sing. N. bit, thou G. betner 1 (wn bit) of thee, of thyself D. Mr, to thee, to thyself A. bid), thee, thyself 1 Sometimes poetically contracted into metn, bein etc. and used in both forms only after a few verbs as: ©e^ fccnfen to thiDk of; ertnnew, to remember; setvjeffeu, to forget etc. Also before adjectives of numbers and after the preposition ftatt, instead of; e. g: Unfer gt^an^tg, breifng etc. toaren ^ugegen, twenty, thirty of us were present. @t foil ftatt meiner ^ingefien, he shall go there instead of me. With t substituted for the v, this genitive is connected with fyalfcen, ioegen, toiUen; as: meinetfyatten for my part. PERS. pronouns: 39 Plur. N. tf)r, you G. euev Qoon eitcf)) of you ? of yourself D. eucfy, to you, to yourself A. euef), you, yourself (or selves, G. D. & A.) Third person singular. Mas. N. er, he G. [enter Qoon if)m) of him, himself D. ifym (fid)) 2 to him, himself A. if)U (fief)) him, himself Fern. N. fie, she G. tfjrer Qoon tt)r) of her, herself D. tf)r (fief)) 2 to her, herself A. fie (fief)) her, herself N. e8, it G. feiner 0>ott H)m) of it D. if)m (fief)) 2 to it, itself A. eS (jid)) it, itself Plur. of the three genders. N. fie, they G. iljrer (son ifmen) of them, themselves D. ifmen (}i(b) 2 to them, themselves A. fie (fief)) them, themselves bcutettoegen on thy account; femettrilten for his sake. Id all other cases the dative with the preposition lunt (wli. governs the dat. case) before it, is used instead of the gen. - ©id) is used as the dative and accusative of the third person when the verb is reflective. 40 PERS. PRONOUNS. The impersonal. N. man , one ? we , they, people etc A. fief), one's self. 1. Yoiij of you., to you when addressed to a single individual; being our equal or superior, or to any person of respectability is rendered in German by © t c 3 , Don 3()tten 3 , 3fynen 3 , governing the verb in the plural ; Ex : ^ennen © i e ifyn ? do you know him. (§r fcfyttft 3fynen biefen Srief, he sends you (to you) this letter. 2. Between near relations and intimate friends 35 it is generally made use of. Also in addressing the Deity. Ex : 3$or end) fyabc id)" feine ©efyettnniffe , benn 2)u Mft rnetn ©ruber unb 2) u mem grennb. From you I keep no secrets , for you are my brother, and you my friend. 3. (§r and fie (third pers. fern, sing.) with the verb in the singular is applied to menials ; as : £)cm8fned)t (cf)tcf er bag ©tufcenmabdjen f)eranf, boots (or porter) send up the chamber-maid. ■Sftarte id) gefye au8, (ie f ami bag 3^ utmer retnigeh, Mary I am going out., you can clean the room. 4. 3fyr (with capital initial) in speaking to country people. In antiquated style it is used instead of © i e. Ex : 3 With capital initials to distinguish this pronoun from the third pers. fern. sing, or from the third pers. plur. when used in speaking of persons or things. PKRS. PRONOUNS. 4i 9(xt6 twlcfyem $orfe fetyb 3H guter 3Jfcmn? from what village are you my good man. 3ji'8 mogticr/, £>err? 3 1) r fafit e3 nie, SBte er nur Sfugen l;at fur fie? is it possible Sir you never saw , that he has but eyes for her. 5. 9)i rt n independent of its being the impersonal pronoun , is made to represent almost every person singular or plural, according to the pe- culiar indications of authority, dignity, arrogance or contempt. Ex: Man fiifyre bie 3 eu gen ^° r / l et tne witnesses be called up. Sttcm tt)trb feme 9ied)te ju ttertfyetbtgen tinffen, I shall know how to defend my rights, ©eben ©ie ifym ba6@elb unb bemerfen ©ie ifym, ba£ man mid) in 3ufunft fcerfdjonen (spare) muffe, give him the money and observe to him that he must not trouble me in future. SBemt man 3t;re8 9latf)eg bebarf, fo ttnrb man if)n tterlangen, when I stand in need of your advice I shall call for it. 6 V Several pronouns succeeding each other as nominatives to the same verb^ the first must be repeated in the corresponding person of the plural number governing that verb in the plural. Ex : 3rf) unb bit, nrir wotten fyeute jnfammen fpetfen, I and you (we) will dine together to day. 2Du, er unb fie, ifyr fottt ju £>aufe bletben, you he and she (you) shall remain at home.. 7. The English objective case of the reflective 42 PERS. PRONOUNS. verb : myself, thyself etc. and each other, one another , is always rendered in German by mid), bid), fid) etc. But if the refl. verb governs the dative case, the second and third person sing, are rendered by mtr, btr and the others by fid) , un$ , etc. Ex. : @r Soermunbet fid), he wounds himself. ©ie lieben ftd), they love each other 4 or themselves, ©te loben ftcfy , they praise themselves , each other or one another. SBtr tditfdjten ung, we deceived ourselves. ©te ftebi fid) in bem ©ptegel, she sees herself in the looking-glass. 3d) nefyme mtr $or, ubermorgen ctbjitreifeu, I propose (to myself) to set off the day after to morrow. Sieber greunb bu giebft btr jit ttiete 9Mf)e dear friend you give (to) yourself too much trouble. 8. ©elbft 5 (self) is added and placed before or after the nom. or ace. of these pronouns, if some particular reference or emphasis is intended ; as : 4 Reciprocity is sometimes given in German by etn^ ember, or gegenfettig. as: xoxx lieben eincmbet $&rtltdj, we love each other tenderly; fie flagen jtdj gegenfeitig ber Unbanf^ Barfeit an, they accuse each other of ingratitude. 5 ^elbfl; represents also the adv. even, in which case it is unaccented and best placed after the verb; e. g. Sftan follte felbji feinen getnben serpen, one should even forgive one's enemies; sometimes at the beginning of the sentence: fefljji feinen gemben fdjmeidjelt ev, he even flatters his enemies. PERS. PRONOUNS. 43 (§r foil felbft Ijierfyer fommen, he shall come here himself. 3d) tt)ili eS felbft fel)en unb fyoren, I will my- self see and hear it. 93efcor 2(nbere micfy acfyten fonnen, mufi td) mid) f e I fe ft adjten, or mu£ id) felbft mify ad^ten, before others can esteem me ? I must esteem myself. (§r felbft toiU ben SBvtcf abtjolen, or er will ben 93rtef f e 1 6 ft abfyolen, or er will felbft ben 23rief abfyoktt, he will fetch the letter himself. 9. Sometimes it stands to express superlatively the highest possible degree of comparison, or rather for the personification of the quality; as: (Sr ift bie Uneigenmi^igfeit felbft, he is disen- terestedness ilself. ©erne Slide fttib bie 33erebtfamfeit felbft, his looks are eloquence itself. 10* The English it after a preposition ? when re- ferring to things or expressions, is translated by ba (there) with the corresponding prepo- sition annexed ; e. g. : ©tellett ©ie bie glafdje auf ben £tfd); jte ftel)t fd)on b a r a U f 6 , put the bottle on the table ; it stands already on it. (5ie fagt, fte n>ei^ nicf)t§ b a & o n , she says she knows nothing of it. fi The r is added for the sake of euphony between ba and auf ; the same is done with the other prepositions be- ginning with a vowel, 44 I'OSS. PRONOUNS. (§r l)tep if)n einen Scfyurfett unb ev fagte nicfytg b a J U , he called him a scoundrel and he said nothing to it. 11. So when referring to a substantive ^ adjective or a whole sentence, and there, when con- nected with the verb to be, showing perma- nency or continuance of action, are rendered in German by eg : (§g ift feme etgene Scfyulb unb id) fyabe eg if)m gcfagt, it is his own fault and I have told him so. Uttfer greunb 9i. ift fefyr geijtg, aber er glauM eg ntrf)t r our friend N. is very stingy, but he does not think so. 3dj beabfufyttgte tbm einen Srtef ju fcfyreiben, fyatte aber feme3*ft eg ?u tfyitn, I intended to write him a letter, but had no time to do so. (§g warm tuele ^etfonen auf bem Salt, /Am? n?0# -e many persons at the ball. (§g giebt fern fcfybnereg Sdwufptel in ber 9?atur, alg bie imtergefyenbe Sonne, M^e m not a finer sight in nature than the setting sun. ©el)et, eg lauft em |>afc fiber bag gelb, see ///*?/£ is a hare running across the field. II. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. i. IN CONJUNCTION WITH A NOUN. Sing. ). pers. 2. pers. 3. pers. mem bein fettt ibr fein my thy his her its poss. pronouns. Plur. unfer our i cuer ' your thv their In conj a subs. .with mas. Form of declension. fern. neut.or substs. plur. JV. mem meine mein meine G. meineS memer meineS memer D. mehtem memer metnem meinen A. meinen meine mem meine 1. Many active verbs governing in English the ace, and in German the dat. and ace. of refl. and other verbs, it is necessary to substitute for my, thy, his 2 etc. the dative of the pers. pron. with the def. art. especially when speaking of things referring to or connected with the bodv. Ex.: 3rf) fyabe mir bag Sent, ben 21 rm gebrodjen, I have broken my leg, my arm. (5r tiurb f \ § 2 tie §(ngen fcerberbett, he will spoil his eyes. (§r fdmeibet fid) in ben finger, he cuts his finger. Wan f)at ifym bag SBcin abnefymen muff en, he was obliged to have his leg amputated. dx fyat if)r bte^anbe aetnmben, he has tied her hands. 3)er $opf tbut mix Wdj, my head aches. 2. The dat. and ace. of the def. art. only is also 1 e before the r may be dropped when declined , or when increased by the addition of i^e or e for the poss. absol. 2 Vide Obs. 2 pers. pron. 46 POSS. ABSOL. PRONOUNS. sometimes made use of instead of the poss. pron.j as: 3d) fyoffe, bit nrirft b e m greunbe biefe 35ttte ge* ttjcifyrett, I hope you will grant your friend this request. (§r ftel fcom Coon bem) Spferbe, he fell from his horse. (§r nafym ben «g>ut uttb gtng fort, he took his hat and went away. @r jog ben3)egen unb gtng mtf ifyn ju, he drew his sword and went up to him. 2. POSSESSIVE ABSOLUTE, IN REFERENCE TO A NOUN. 1. This pronoun is formed by the def. article and the addition of tge or e to the conj. poss. in the nom sing, and en for the plural ^ and is declined after Decl. II. of adjs. M. F. N. PL bermetntge btemetntge bagmeintge btememigen j g ber meine bie metne bag meine bte metnen \ § or without the def. art. being then declined after Adjs. Decl. I. part I. * M. F. N. PL metner meine metneg metne. Ex.: SBeffen £ang ift bag ? eg tft tt>eber bag metntge, nod) bag fetntge, or n>eber bag metne, nod) bag feme, or fteber metneg, nod) fetneg; whose house is that ? it is neither mine nor his. 2. The articles and terminations of these pronouns * Except gen. sing. mas. and neut. which have e3; this case however seldom occurs iu this form of the poss. abs. POSS. ABSOL. PROXOUXS. 47 do not agree with the possessor, but with the object referred to : 3d) fenne 3I;re great imb aucfy bte feintge, or feitte, I know your wife and his also. £at mem Sofm ober ber tf)rige (or tfyrer) btefen 93rtef gefef/rieben, has my son or hers written this letter. erfud)en ©te mm bag 3 f) r t g e ; I cannot save your friend ; I have done what was in my power} try now what is in yours, (§r tft ntcf)t |>err ii&er bag ©eitttge, he is not master of his own property. The first form, ber memtge etc. is preferable and generally used; the second occurs most frequently in poetry; and the third principally after the verb fetytt, or where particular em- phasis is intended. They may however be * See Note R. 6. Decl. substs. 48 DKMONSTR. PRONOUNS. used indiscriminately to avoid unpleasant repe- tition : 2£ie tnel foftet 3fyr *Pferb? ba3 meinige tft beffer , obg(etcf) 3b re 3 mefyr foftet, what is the price of your horse ? mine is better, though yours costs more. 2&el$er Sorfcfylag gefaUtSfynen am beften, feiner ober met Iter? which proposal do you like best, his or mine ? III. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. i. DEMONSTRATIVE CONJUNCTIVE, OR ABSOLUTE. l Sing. M. F. N. Plur. N. biefer 2 biefc btefeS this btefe these N. |ener 2 jene jene6 that jene those N.ber 3 bie ba§ this or that bie these orthose I. fDiefer and fetter point more distinctly to the object than ber, except in animated speech when the latter is employed with the strongest possible emphasis: Xiefer 9J?cnfcft madji mir greube, jener Summer, this man gives me pleasure, that one pain. 2) e r 9)ten[cf) nttr tamx gludf(icf) genannt Herbert, befieit (Seele rein unb unbeflecft ift, thai man 1 When absolute, they often correspond to the English : this one, that one. 2 Gen. Dat. and Ace. the same as of the def. art. 3 Declined like the def. Art. when conjunctive; when absol. orrelat, the gen. mas. arid neut. make beffetl, gen. fem. and plur. beren, and dat. plur. ben en; beffen is some- times contracted into b cb ; beret stands sometimes for benen. DEM0XSTK. PRONOUNS. 49 only can be called happy, whose mind is pure and unpolluted. 2. 2) e r is also used to prevent a too frequent repetition of biefer and jener, or when the per- sons or objects spoken of are, as it were equally near in the mind of the speaker. Like- wise in phrases of indifference > contempt; de- precation etc. sometimes with, sometimes without emphasis ; ex : liefer Sftenfd) fprtcfrt tnuncr £on ft*, jener fcott Stttbern unb ber Don gar ttidjtS; this person always speaks about himself, that one about others, and this one about nothing at all. £)er [off nun fetn £etf anberSwo ttevfucfyen, he (i. e. that one) may now try his chance elsewhere. JDtr? tt)a3 faun ber tf>un? that fellow? what can he do? 2)er furdjtet fid) [a *>or feinem eigenen ©cfcatten! Indeed he fears his own shadow. 3. This and these as adverbs of time must be rendered in German by fett; e. g. 3d) l)abe itjn fett einem Ttonat ntcfyt gefefyen, I have not seen him this month. These six months, feit fed)8 Sttonaten. 2. DEMONSTRATIVE -RELATIVE. M. F. A 7 . PL N. berjentge 4 , btejemge ba6jenige btejenigen N. ber 3 bte ba$ btc he 5 she 5 that 5 , what; they 5 , those 5 * Declined like the clef. art. and adj. of Decl. II. of adjs. 6 Followed by who or which. 4 50 DKMOXSTR. -ABSOLUTE. 1. Both berienige and its contraction ber are fol- lowed by the rel. pron. Welcfyer, either imme- diately or in the second part of the sentence. 2. 2>er being also a relative^ it may as such follow berjemge. Serjenige, woeldjer ju tuel erwartet, totrb feltcn befrtebigt; or berjemge xvixb feltcn ftefriebigt, tt>eldf>er $u t>iel erftavtet; or JDer, n>clc£>er etc.; or 3)er ftirb felten etc. He who expects too much, will rarely be satisfied. 3. !Der as a demonstr. pron. may be followed by ber as a relative^ especially in the dat. or ace. in which case its former capacity must be in- dicated by emphasis: 3) e r , ben ©ie fur ifyrett $reunb geljalten fyaben, t>at fie fcerratfyen. He, whom you thought your friend, has betrayed you. 4. SDerjenige is more forcible than ber. 3. DEMONSTRATIVE -ABSOLUTE 6. M. F. N. PI. bevfelk 7 ,biefelbe,ba3fel6e, biefelben,the same, thatsame. 1. !l)erfelbe is also used as a demonstr. relat. having ber preferably as a relative after it. @g tft berfelbe Sftann, ben id) fo oft bet 31)nen 6 Also used conjunctively , when it frequently cor- responds to the Engl, the very, that very. 7 Declined like def. art. and adj. Decl. IT. of adjs. — £>erfelMge etc. is also sometimes met with. DEMON ST R. - ABSOLUTE. 51 gefefycn babe, it is the same man I have so often seen with you. 2. As a demonst. absol. it often supplies the place of the pers. pron. in order to avoid ambiguity, relating: to the latter subst. in the sentence : ©ie ttmrbett bon mdjreren Stcmbern cmgefatten unb ba biefelben (inst. of fie) 8 ofcne SHJaffcn warm, fo nmrben ftc leidbt ubenvunben, they were attacked by several robbers , but as they were without arms, they were easily overpowered. 3)er ©otyrt erflcirte bem SSater fretmutfyig, bajj ber- felbe trrtge Shtftcftteit babe, the son declared candidly to his father, that he (the father) entertained erroneous opinions. 3. It is also used to prevent an unpleasant repe- tition of the pers. pron. as : ^atfte biefelben (inst. of fie fie) angenommen? did she accept them. 3f)te greuube finb in ber Stabt, gotten ©te bte- felben bei mix einfu^rctt? your friends are in town, will you introduce them at my house ? 3)ie8 i}t mem 33ruber, wotten ©ie il)ti benfeiben (inst. ofiljnen) fcorfteflm? this is my brother, will you introduce him to them? 4. Besides the same, the very same 9 , being trans- lated by berfelbe etc. the dat. and ace. of the pers. pron. is often rendered in German by ber> * <£>te would leave it in doubt whether the persons at- tacked or the robbers were meant. 9 (£ben berfelbe etc. 4. 52 IIRLAT. PRONOUNS. fclbt etc. when relating to abstract nouns, espe- cially in the plur. number; as: Qx rebet s>on ber greunbfcfraft nnb Sugenb, fennt biefelfcen afcer nur bem Harnett nacft. He talks of friendship and virtue, but knows them only by name. 5. In formal language the plural btefelbett appears in connexion with tyod), f)odjft, alIerf)orf)ft 10 in speaking of or to persons of the highest ranks. Seine Sftajefiat [tub f)ter eingetroffen, StHerfyodjft* biefelben Herbert aber nur einige £age fyier t>er^ Weilen, H. M. has arrived here intending to make a stay of only a few days. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 1. RELATIVE-CONJUNCTIVE. M. F. N. PL N. welcfyer ll ttveldje weldjeS tteld)e who, which N. ber etc. (decl. like the dem. relat.) 1. 3BeId)er refers to a distant, ber to a near antece- dent ; as : (Sr ifi ber greunb beg ^ontgS, ttelcfyer tym unter alfen Umftdnben tie 2Bal)rf)eit fagt He is the friend of the king, to whom under all circumstances he tells the truth. (Sr ifi ber greunb beS ^onigS, ber ifyn fcfy&^t 10 9UUrIji>d$ of imperial or royal personages, fyodjji of minor sovereigns and f)od) of high officers of state. 11 Decl. like the def. art. However the gen. of toeltfjet, as a relat. pron. is never used, beffen being substituted for the gen. mas. and neut. and beren for the gen. fem. sing, and gen. plur. of the three genders. RELAT.- ABSOLUTE. 53 unb cuttet, he i.s the friend of the king, who values and esteems him. 2. In German the relat. prons. refer to the third person only: if therefore, particularly in solemn language, they are to relate to the first or second person as being nominatives to a verb, the personal pronoun must be repeated after the relative, which in such cases is always ber. 3dj bin ber ^en betn ©ott, ber tit bWj au8 (Sgtyptat gefufyrt babe; I am the lord thy God which (I) have brought thee out of the land of Egypt. 35u, ber bu tm^immel tbrctteft, thou who (thou) reignest in heaven. 3. The gen. of ber is used instead of the poss. pron. to avoid ambiguity; e. g. 3)ie £eutfcben fcbreiben gegenttwrttg steleS fiber bte granjofen unb beren ©efefce; the Ger- mans write at present much on the French and their laws, ifyre might cause some doubt whether the laws of the French or Germans were meant. @T bettmnberi QJoltaire unb beffen 3 e i*S cno ff ctt J he admires Voltaire and his contemporaries. €ie fprad) mit ber gfrau unb beren Stfwejter, she spoke to the woman and her (the wo- man's) sister. 2. RELATIVE -ABSOLUTE. Of persons of both genders. Of things. X. 9Ser ] 2 who. whoever N. H)aS, what, whatever 12 This pronoun refers to mankind in general and may also be used instead of the Demonstr. - Relat, berjemge 54 BELAT.- ABSOLUTE. G. weffen, whose, whose-soever G. weffen, of what etc. D. ftem, to whom, to whomever D. ft) cm, to what A. tt)en, whom, whomever A. wag, what 1. After tt>er and n>ag, the demonstr. ber etc. is sometimes expressed, sometimes understood. , 333 er bag beftauptet, ber tft fdjledjt unterrtdjtet whoever maintains that, is ill informed. 2Ber ifyr 8Mb ftefyt, erfcmtt fie, whoever sees her picture, recognises her. SBag er btfyaxtpkt, bag tioirb er aucf; augfiifyren, what he maintains, he will also execute. 2Sa§ er anfctngt, mtfjglMt tfym, whatever he begins, he is unsuccessful in. 2. Absolute and without any relative understood or expressed this pronoun is used in its most general and indeterminate sense, as: 3d) ttmp nidjt, tt>er eg tft, I do not know who it is. (§r etrietf) fogleicfy, tt>effen ©timme eg war, he guessed immediately whose voice it was. 3)ian mup ntdjt immer glauben, wag bie Seute fagen, one must not always believe, w r hat people say. 3. In phrases where in English this pronoun is the nominative or objective case to a verb in when the latter is meant to relate to no particular indi- vidual. Not rcelcfjer but ber follows it, which however may be often understood, more especially in passive constructions e. g. ager itjm fcfymetcfyetr. (rev) toirt) tunt iijm Betadjtet. He who flatters him (berjeitige, wlfytt etc.) is despised by him. IXTERROG. PRONOUNS. 55 the potential mood, it is rendered in German by toer cmd), waS aucf), giving it the most un- limitted relation as to persons or things e. g. SBer eS aucf) fei, td& null if)ti ntdjt foremen, who- ever it may be ; I will not speak to him. 28er e$ aucf) gefaat feat, id) fann c§ tridji glaubetti whoever may have said it, I cannot believe it. 2Ba6 er and) bat>on bettfen mag, tcft fann eo nicfyt anbern, whatever he may think of it, I cannot help it. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. These are M. F. A T . PL welder 13 toelcfye rceldjeS tt>elc|c which, what n>er it>a^ * who, what urelcf) em eine ein roelcfye what ttaS fur ein eine ein ttaS fur what,whatsort, what kind of 1. 2Befd)er is used with or without a substantive, tDer and roa§ are used as enquiries in relation to substantives of any gender or number. Ex.: 2Be(d)en 9fomten t>erbtent eine folcfte «£)anb(ung? what name does such an action deserve? SBelcfte @djtt>ejler ift bte altefte? which sister is the eldest. 2Be(*eS feiner $inber liebt er am metften? which of his children does he love best? SSSer ift biefe 2)ame? who is that lady? 13 Declined like the def. art. * Decl. the same as the rel. absol. OB IXTERKOG. PRONOUNS. SBer ftnb btefe Scute? who are these people? 2Ba3 fd)rei6en©te ba? what are you writing there? 2. SBelder etc. enquires more minutely than tt>er and \va&} e. g. ©ie fyred)en son eincm Setter; t>on n) element? SBer tourbe n>iffen, weld) en ©ie ineirten, tt>enn ©ie feineu SRamen nidjt nennen, you speak of a cousin; of which? who could know which you mean, if you do not mention his name? ©ie l)at tf)ven ©deleter fcerloren; toeldben? 2)en grimen. Unb w> e r bat ifyn gefitnben? Sttetn ©ruber. 2Befd)er? £er SBttyefot. She has lost her veil; which? the green one. And who has found it? my brother; which? William. SB em fott id) biefen 35rtef gefren? SMner <&d)m* fter. 2BeId)er? 3)er jungften. To whom am I to give this letter? to my sister. Which? the youngest. SBeffen SBerfe lefen ©ie? whose works are you reading. SBaS benfen ©ie wn biefem ©cfyriftfteller? what do you think of this author? 3. SBelcfy 14 ein and \va§ fur em are made use of before or in reference to a noun. In the first case ein is declined like the indef. art. in the latter, like adjs. Decl. I. part. I * Ex. : 2Beld) cine graufame |)anbluug woollen ©ie ba 14 SQBeldj is not declined when in connexion with ein. * Exc. gen', mas. and neut. ee, «en, fern. et\ DISTKIBUT. AND IXDEF. PRONOUNS. 0/ begef)en ? What cruel act are you about to commit ? (§ben wax em «£)err ba. 2Ba3 fur einer? Just now there was a gentlemau here ; what gentle- man , or what sort of a etc. 2Ba3 fur cut £>auS f)at er ba cjebaxtt ? What kind of a house has he built there ? 2Ba6 fur eineS metnen ©ic, ba§ borten? What house do you mean, that yonder? 4. SBelcf) ein relates more to the individual or object of enquiry, fta6 fur tin more to the quality; yet the latter is often used for both 3 and consequently more commonly met with. SBeldj einen groperen 93en>ei3 t>erIatn]euSte? What greater proof can you desire ? 93on \va§ fur einem SSewet^ fprcdjen 6ie? AVhat kind of proof are you talking of? 33on bem 23ett)eife feincr freunbfcfyaftltcfyen ©eftn* nungen; of the proof of his friendly intentions. 5. They are also used in exclamations, as : 2Beld£) ein 2£ett>, weld) cine grau I)at er inS (5(enb gefturjt! What a woman, what a wife has he reduced to distress ! 2Ba3 fur ein auperorbentltckS (gretgnip! AVhat an extraordinary occurrence ! DISTRIBUTIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. They are : 3emanb 15 , some one, any one, somebody. 9ftemanb 15 , no one, nobody, none, any one *. 15 This pron. admits of no variation except s for the gen, * With the verb in the negative. 58 DIJSTRIBUT. AND INDKF. PRONOUNS. 3eber i 3ebtt)eber ; 16 , every (one), each, either ,7 . 3egltd)er 1 Sebermamt 16 , every one, every body. Reiner 16 , no, no one, not a, none, any, not any neither 17 . 9D?ancfyer 16 , many a one; plur. some and many. &t\va$ 16 , some. SBelcber j6 , some, any. ©etotffer J6 , certain, some, any. Solder 16 , such. (Sin etltjiger J8 , one, a or one single. $em einjtg^r ]8 , none, not one, not a single. Setbe 19 , both, either. Wl 18 , all, any. and en for the dat. and ace. and this only in colloquial discourse. 16 Declined as adjs. Decl. I. Part I. with $ for gen. m. and n. except Sebetmcnut, which admits of no other vari- ation than the gen.' or eo. Seber is preferable to jebttebev and }egltri)er, which are only used in formal or antiqua- ted style, ©olefy is not declined before em ; fern is 1111 decl. in the 110m. mas. and neut. sing. , when before a noun. Q?tma$ admits of no variation. 17 Either — or and neither nor, are rendered in Germ, by enttoeber — obet and toeber — ttod) ; as: Neither you nor he shall have it 9 toeber bu nod) ev foil ee fyaben. Neither the one nor the other has said it, toeber ber (Sine nodj bev 3liu bere tjat ee gefagt. Either it is his or her fault, enttoebev ift ee feme ober ifyxt ©djulb. 18 Adjs. Decl. I. Part I. 19 23etbe used in the plur. only. We say also betbeS of both things, as: £Beit>e3 ricfyttg; both things are right; betbee toitb gefallen; both things will please. DISTRIBUT. AND INDEF. PRONOUNS. 59 Examples. Semanb begegnete mix auf ber Sreippe , I met some one on the stairs. 3ft 3entcmb i>a ? is any one there ? Semcmb toartet auf ©ie, somebody is waiting for you. 3ft 9ftemanb fyter gewefen ? has nobody been here. @6 fyat Sftiemanb nacfy Styim gcfragt , no one has enquired for you. 9Kemanb ift fo taub aid ber, roelcfyer nicfyt feoren Witt, none is so deaf^ as he that will not hear. 3d) sertraue e3 3fynen, trg&fyfot Sic eS aber an 9ltemanb , I entrust it to you , but do not tell it to any one. 3$ liebe jebett t>on ifynen, I like every one of them. (§3 ift Die Sppidjt eitteS jeben STOenfdjen, fetnem SSater- lanbc m'tfiltcf) ju fetytt , it is the duty of every man to be useful to his country. dx gab jebem ber ^tnber em Suit, he gave a book to each of the children. 3ebe# btefer Sitter foftet jreei Scaler , each of these books costs two Thaler. 9(iif jeber ©ette ftanb erne ©djilbtt>ad)e , on either side stood a sentry. 3ebermauu ift nidjt fo Hug, al8 ©te, every one is not as wise as you. 2Ba3 er weif?, vx>et§ 3ebennann, whatever he knows, every body knows. ©mb feine Sriefe fur micfy ba ? are there no let- ters for me ; feine , none. Reiner or feineS u>eip ci\x>a$ bason, no one knows any thing of it. BO biSTKIBUT. ASD INDEF. PRONOUNS. (§6 war feme Seek im £aufe, there was not a soul in the house. (§3 befummert fid) feiner urn ifyn, no one cares for him. @r fyat kin ©elb 6ei fid), fyaben ©ie fcineg? he has no money about him , have you none , any or not any? Seiner t>on ifynen ttnfl eg eingeftefyen , neither 20 of them will acknowledge it, Sftancfyer f)at (id) baju entfd)liepen muffen , many a one was obliged to make up his mind to it. 9Jknd)e Zzutc Gotten bag ©egentfyetl fcefyauptett, some people will maintain the contrary. ■SKandje Seute glaubett man tranche uur reicft ju fetytt um glutfltd) }it fetyrt , many people think, they need only be rich to be happy. 3d; bxaufyt eiwas ©elb, ftaben ©ie tr e i cb e o ? I want some money , have you any. ©ie fcerlangen Slepfel, fyier finb welcfte, you wish for some apples ? there are some. SBenn uur tie ©itten gewiffer Golfer mit Unpar- teilicbfett betracfyten, if we examine the manners of different nations with impartiality; fo U>erben U)tr feineS (Self) fo ungebilbet ftnben , we shall find none so rude, ale bap e6 obne all e jRegeltt ber £)bf{id)Feit Ware, as to be without any rules of politeness. -° Neither j referring to two persons or things is ex- pressed in Germ, by feiner u\ &011 betben, as: neither road leads to town, feiner ber feeiben $}ege fitfjrt §ur Stabt. Have you seen John or Charles? neither of then) has been here to day, hac-en £ie Sotjann ober jlavl gefe^enV Reiner »i>« feeibeti ift beute fyiev getoefen. IHSTSIBUT. AND 1XDEF. PROXOUXS. 6l (Sin ©ewifter (nit eS gefagt, a certain one 2I has said it. ©old) tin STOann, f o I ct> eine gxau t)erbienen befofynt ju Herbert, such a man, such a woman, deserve to be rewarded. (§r weip mdjt, bap er em folcfcer SRmfdj ift, he does not know that he is such a man. (Sttt emjtgcr nur fteip batten, one only knows of it. (Smetnjiger Sftatrofe tt>arb nocf)Iebenb aufbent SBracf gefnnben, one sailor only was found yet alive on the wreck. Unto alien biefen gebern ift niefct eine einjige gute , among all these pens there is not a single good one 2I . @r f)at if)n feineS emjigen 23licfe3 genntrbigt, he did not deign to bestow a single look on him. Rein etnjiger feincr Sefannten rear gcgenwartig, not a single person of his acquaintance was present. 33etbc famen aid es $n fpat lt>ar , both came when it was too late. S3etbe Strain fufyren nad) bent ^alafte , either street leads to the palace. 31 Vide R. 4 Decl. II of Adjs. 62 NUMBERS. NUMBERS. CARDINAL NUMBERS (Orunbjatyten). StnS * l , one. jttei, two. brei , three. trier, four. funf, five. fecfjg, six. ftefeen, seven. ad)t, eight. neittt, nine. §eijn , ten. elf, eilf, eleven. $tt>olf, twelve, breijcbn , thirteen, meruit, fourteen. ffinfjefytt , fifteen. fec£)jeJ)n , sixteen. ftebenjefyn or ftebjefyn, se- venteen. acfttjefyn, eighteen. neunjefyn, nineteen. gwatifttg, twenty. einunb jttNUtjig/tvrenty one. jtt)ct unb jnxmjig, twenty two etc. bretjng , thirty. irierjig, forty. funfjtg, fifty. [0*519, sixty. fteb(en)jtg , seventy. adjtjtg, eighty. neunjig, ninety. fyunbert, a 2 hundred. * 3e eine , je §toet , je brei :c. corresponds to the English one at a time 3 two at a time etc. 1 Softened into etlt, when before another number, or in conjunction or relation to a noun , being in the former case identical as to declension with the indef. art. and in the latter, with Decl. I of adjs. except gen. mas. # neut. terminating in ee and gen. fern, er, e. g. <§aben (Ste etnen obev $tt?ei SBrubet ? have you one or two brothers ? — 9htr nod) einen, betm enter ftavb in SBeftmbten ; only one, for one died in the West Indies. 2 A is not rendered in Germ, except before SO^tUton , in the middle of a number, or where some particular em- phasis is intended. NUMBERS. 63 fyimbert unb ein8, a hun- dred and one. taufenb , a thousand, jc^n taufenb,ten thousand. fyunbert taufenb 3 , a hun- dred thousand. eine Million , a million. ORDIN Air NUMBERS (Drbnung,6^leu). (3)er, bie bae) erfte * first. §tx>eite, second, bvttte, third, srierte , fourth. funfte, fifth. fed)3te, sixth, ftebente, seventh. adjte, eighth, nmnle, ninth. jefynte, tenth, elftc ( eilfte f 3tt)olfte, twelfth. breijeljnte , thirteenth, inerjefynte , fourteenth. eleventh. fiinfjefynte , fifteenth. fecf)5ef)nte / sixteenth. fteb(en)3ef)nte, seventeenth. acf)t3et)nte , eighteenth. neunjefmte , nineteenth. jttanjtgfte , twentieth. em unb jwanstgfie, twenty first. jttet unb jftanjtgfte, twen- ty second etc. brctpigftc , thirtieth. irierjigfte, fortieth. fiinfjigfte, fiftieth. fedjjtgjie, sixtieth. (ieb(en)3tgfte, seventieth. 3 100,000 being followed by other numbers is rendered by etnmal, §toetntai fyunberttaufenb ic. Thus 145,000, 250,000 einmal Ijunbert unb fiutf unb fcier^ig taufenb and §freimal fyun- bert unb funf$ig taufenb. * From these are formed the ordinal adverbs erftcng, jhmtenS , brittettg *c. , firstly ^ secondly, thirdly etc. In phrases like the following : chapter the first , verse the second, line third, the article in German must precede the noun, or ma}- be entirely omitted, as: (§rfie3 Statyitti gtoeiter $er$ , britte 3eile. NUMBERS. atftjtgfte, eightieth. taxtfcnbfte r thousandth. nemtjigfte , ninetieth. jefmtcmfenbjle , ten thou- dlttlbertfte , hundredth. sandth. futnbert unb crftc , hundred fyunberttaufenbfte , hun- and first. dredthousandth. jtt>ci^Uttbertftc ■, two hun- mttftonfte, millionth. dreth . 1. Repetition is indicated in German by „mal" or „maty. n 3cfe fya&e eg fcfyon jtoeimal gefagt, \vk tttelmal tt>erbc icf> es ttneberholen mitffcti? I have al- ready said it twice , how many times shall I have to repeat it. , STieS ift bag erftemat unb unrb aucfi bag (efeiental feint, tap tcf) biefer 33orftetfung fcetawfyrte, this is the first time and will also be the last time that I shall be present at this represen- tation. 2. Sometimes „mal" is taken substantively, when the numeral or other noun preceding it, is re- gularly declined 3 as : £ie£ erne SJlal nur Der&eifyeit ©ie tym, for this once only pardon him. 3. The accumulative term, fold is rendered in Ger- man by fact) or faltig 5 the latter however more usually in composition with tnefyr, tuel, mamttg 2C. 2Ba3 gefaet nnrb, giebt biefer SSoben jefyn- unb funfseftnfad) (or fdlttg) jurucf, whatever is sown 5 this soil yields ten - and fifteenfold. Seine fcrielfdltigen SSefdjdftigimgen bertyinbern ton une biefeS grito jaftr ju befucfren , his manifold NUMBERS. 65 occupations prevent his coming to see us this spring. 4. 3)o$>ett or wetfacb, breiboppelt or bretfadj ic. is used in German for double 4 , triple 4 etc. 5. let (from the obsolete Setae, way, kind, sort) is added to the gen. pi. of numbers to denote distinction or variety, e. g. 3)iefe8 ©efe£ farm auf jweierlei 8lrt auSgelcgt fttterben , this law may be interpreted two different ways. 3^eter(et SBBeiti bet Za\d tyaben, to have two different sorts of wine at table. SlHerlet, mcmckrlei, feinerlci are used in the sense of: all sorts of things , various and no sort of things. 6. Fractional numbers 5 are formed by the addition of 1 to the ordinal number, as : ein 33terte(, a fourth part ; brd Stertel, three fourths: Xrtttet, third part etc. 3wei unb bret SBtertcI @tfen Zu&) , two ells and three quarters of cloth. One and a half is rendered by anbertftalb , two and a half by brittbaU\ three and a half by fctert* £)alb etc. Thus adding fyalb to every number in succession to the one intended to be increased 4 In Germ, the article must precede this number as well as breifacf) , (jalfi and gan$, e. g. (*r brand): He boM>efte 3eit urn es gu tfntu r he requires double the time to do it iu. ®t I) at tint Ijatfce ©tutibe getoartet, he has been waiting half an hour. £te gatt$e 3Belt trei^ e$, all the world knows it. 3 The indefinite number „odd" must be given by erlidje or ettttge , as : He gave thirty odd pounds for his horse , er oab etlidje breifjig ^funb fur }tin ^Pferb. 66 NUMBERS. by a half. These numbers are also frequently ex- pressed by em unb em ftalb 4 , jtoet unb em I) alb etc. 7. Half past twelve, half past one^ half past two. three etc. in speaking of the hour must be ren- dered in German by: balb eittS, balb jti>ei, I) alb bret etc. A quarter past twelve > a quarter past one etc. by em SStcrtel auf cinS , ein 93teriel auf jtoet etc. The same with the three quarters. A quarter to one etc> ein 93tertel fcor or ju cin8. Minutes are also counted onward, thus 5^ 10 etc. minutes past one , two , three etc. , fttttf 9RttUU ten auf jtt>et, bret etc. Ten minutes to one, jebn SDWnuten &ov or ju ems. 8. 3^ e * anc l ^ are declined in the gen. and dat. (er , en) and the latter only in relation to a sub- stantive, as is the case with some other radical numbers 3 which use has sanctioned ; as : 3)er Xienev jweter £>erren fetn, to be the ser- vant of two masters. ?(u8 breten em$ toafjltn, to choose one out of three; or au8 bret 3)ingcn ein3 ftafylen. 3RH ©edjfett fabren, to ride in a carriage and six ; or mix fec£)6 Spferben fo^rm. 2ie liegen ba JU Saufenben , they lie there by thousands. 9. Substantives denoting weight, measure or part of a whole body do not admit of a plural after ordinal numbers 6 ; ex : f ' Excepted are all words in e as: ffiodje (week), ©tunbe [hour) etc.; Xag, 2ft on at and Saljr are used in both forms. NUMBERS. 67 3$ babe jelm gap SBetn unb jtt>ei gap 9ium tin teller , I have ten casks of wine and two puncheons of rum in the cellar, 2)teS wiegt mebrere fyunbert spfunb , this weighs several hundred pounds. 3d) habz eben fcrei SJSaar f)ubfcf>e £)anbfcr>ube ge* faitft , I have just bought three pair of fine gloves. 2edj3 SSucf) Spopter, six quires of paper. Secfcjtg taufenb 9Jtann fyabm ben 9U)eht "pafftrt ' sixty thousand men have passed the Rhine. S)ie SJifte f)at brei gup fedjg 3°W to SSterecf , the box is three feet six inches square. 10. Both ; cardinal and ordinal numbers, can be used substantively: cine @tn , bte gitnf, tie $d)n (as said of cards); ber 3^te; ein gunfjtger.. a man 50 years of age. THE PREPOSITIONS. Some German prepositions always govern the Gen. , others the Dat. , and others again the Ace. There are also some, that govern according to cir- cumstances j now the Dat. and then the Ace. I. PREPOSITIONS REQUIRING THE GENITIVE. anftatt or ftatt ' , instead of. fjal&en or halter 2 , on account, for the sake of. 1 €>tatt is sometimes taken substantively. 2 «§alfren and falter 'follow the substantive; the former is used preferably when the noun is preceded by an art. or pron. (Vide Examples; also Person. Prons. obs. 1). 5. 66 PREPOSITIONS. au£erl)Cllb, out of, on the outside, without. mnerfyalb , within , on the inside. oberfjalb , above , on the upper side. imierfyctlb , below , on the lower side. bieffeitS , on this side. jenfeit^, on the other side, beyond, opposite. f raft , by virtue of. lattt, according, conformably. mittelfi or fcerinittelft , by means of. urn 4 . . . nriffen , for the sake of. Uttgeacfytet, notwithstanding. imtioett , not far from. ttermoge, by dint, power or means of. tt>al)renb, during. VDegen, on account of, concerning. Examples. ©efyen ©ieflatt metner bortf)in, goihere instead of me. @r regiert an be3 gurften Sftttt, he governs instead of the prince. 3)e3 StnftcmbeS Ijalb*n 2 unterfaffen ©ie e$, for de- cency's sake desist. SlltcrS l)alb*r 2 nmrbe er in ben Siufrefianb fcerfefct, he was allowed to retire on account of old age. ©cm (Sinfommen unffet^aUi beS 8cmbe£ fcerjeljren, to spend one's income out of the country. 3mterl)alb bet ©renjen beg SfajianbeS bleiben, to remain ivithin bounds of propriety. (Sine ©efeUfcfyaft beabftcfytigt SBaffcrbc^altcr ubn^atb ber ©tabt anlegen ju laffen , a company intends ha- ving reservoirs above the town for the supply of water. PREPOSITIONS. 69 UlnUrtjatb ber Stabt am gluffe ftetyen fctele gifc^er^ fyittten, below the town near the river side there are many fishermen's huts. JJiefllrita 3 beg glnffeg ift ber Soben gan$ anberg , alg jetifett0 3 , on Am side of the river the soil is quite different as on the opposite side. ilraft meineg Sfatteg , by virtue of my office. iaut femer 2(ugfage , according to his evidence. £ag fann mtt tntttdft enter £am:pfmafcfmie tton fcierjtg ^Sferbefraft gefeoben Herbert , this can only be raised by means of a steam-engine of 40 horse power. IKm 4 be^ Stnbeg ttrillett 4 * erbarmet end), /or the child's sake have mercy. 2f)uet eg inn memettotlUn * do it for my sake. Kn0eari)t*t after femer Semubungett wtrb eg ifmt bennoct) ntcbt getingen, notwithstanding all his ef- forts he will not be able to succeed. IHnumt ber Stabt amrbe bag gfefl beg Ianbix>trtt)^ fdjaftltd&en SSemnS gefetert, wo£ /wr from the town they celebrated the anniversary of the agricultural society. Vexmo#t etner befonbern Ueberemfunft, by means of a special agreement. Waljreut* femer gemjen fJteife bafer nic^t etmnal ge* fcfyrieben, during his whole journey, he did not write once. 3 Sometimes used elliptically ', as: bie£feti3, jeitfetts? (ber Ibemfe) on this side , oil the other side of the Thames ; ienfett^ (be$ ©robes) , beyond the grave. * Always seperated except when in connexion with the gen. of the pers. pron. * See Pers. Pron. obs. 1. 70 PREPOSITIONS. ©cm QSater fceflagt (id) roigtti feine£ langen 2(ufent* fyalte^ ju ^artS , his father complains on account of his long stay at Paris. II. PREPOSITIONS REQUIRING THE DATIVE. a\l$ f out of, from. aufier , out of, besides. bet \ close to, near, at, with, by. Mtmetl, within (a certain time). entgegen 2 , towards, contrary to. gegertuber 2 *, opposite. gemaf* 2 , conformable, according to. Icings, along. mtt, with, along with. nacf), after, to, for, according to 3 . nacfyft or juncicfyft, next, near by, close by. ttebfi, together with, besides. ob, on account of, above. fammt f , together with. fctt, since. ttott \ from,, of, by, off. ju *, to, at, by, on. jufolge 4 , in compliance. jUWiber 2 , contrary, opposed to, in opposition to. 1 33ei, tton and $u, in familiar discourse coalesce with the dat. of the def. art. as: betm for bet bem; ttom for »on bent ; £ttm for $u bem ; ^ur for $u bei\ 2 Stands always after its case. * May be seperated. See Examples. 5 In this sense it follows the case. See Examples. j Nearly obsolete. 4 If placed before a noun it requires the gen. PREPOSITIONS. 71 Examples. 3d) fyabe il)\x aus bem £aufe fomntett fefyen , I have seen him come out of the house. 3tu£*r mtr fyat er feinen gxeunb, he has no friend besides me. @r brtngt feme $tit groptettttyeite aufier bent |)aufe jU , he spends his time mostly out of the house. <§x ftanb bet bem ©enerat, alS il)n erne 5htgel traf, he stood close to the general when a bullet hit him. 3)a3 Sweater ftefyet bet bem ^alaft, the theatre stands near the palace. @r nnrb morgett bet 3t;rem ©fyeim fpetfen, he will dine to morrow at your uncle's, imb ubermorgen bet 3^en (§(tern, and the day af- ter to morrow with your parents. (§r fa£te ifyn plofclid) betm * Slrme, he took him suddenly by his arm. SBenn ©ie fid) binnett etnem SKonate nicbt beftimmt erfldren r fo betradjte ic^ ben 93ertrag ate aufgefyoben , if you do not declare your intentions positively within one month, I shall consider the agreement as annulled. SJieirt 33ruber ttwfynt mtr {jefleniiber, my brother lives opposite to me. 2)a6 9tatl$au8 fte^et ijqjeit ber &ircf)e fiber, the town-hall stands opposite the church. 3)em SBertrage ber betben SRacfyte gemi^ seremigten fief) tf)re gotten unter etnem 23efeW3f)aber, conformable to the treaty of the two powers their fleets are joined under one command. 2>te gejhmgen liimj* bem iRfyeme, the fortresses along the Rhine, 72 PREPOSITIONS. ©efyen @ie mit mtr unb mehtent 33ruber biefeti 2(6enb in bag Sweater , go with me and my brother in the theatre this evening. @ef)en ©tc bocft mit mtr ! pray come along with me ! tied) etntgm Slugenfclitfen fain er ttteber jurucf, after some moments he returned again. Sfteifen Sic biefen (Sonuner nad) bar ©d)tt>eij ober nad) granfveuf ? do you travel this summer to Switzer- land or to France ? SBann iverben 5ie nad) bemgeftlanbe abretfen? when do you mean to set off for the continent? (§3 fragt 3enianb nad) 3bften , somebody enquires /»/■ you. Sltlem Sfnfcbetn nad) 3 rotrb mtr ba3 Unternefymen ge* Itncjen, according to all appearances I shall succeed in the undertaking. 3dj ef)re ifjn niidjjl meinert @ltern am meiften , next to my parents I honour him most. £ie Drangerie tfi 3unad)ll bem botamfefcn ©arten, the green- house is close by the botanical garden. 3d) fyore, er feat bag |)au3 n*b|l attcm ft>a3 bartn tfi gefauft, I hear he has bought the house together with all it contains. ©b bem Serge, above the mountain, Tag (£d)tff fammt berSabung [tub Derforeit gegangen, the ship together with the cargo have been lost. grit fetnem ^terfettt fyabe tdj tfen nureinmal gefefyen, smc^ his stay here , I have seen him only once. (§r war tinn einem feteer mtrauteften greunbe be- gkitrf , he was accompanied by one of his most intimate friends. PREPOSITIONS. 73 SKeta Srubet ift eta greunb turn jaljlreicfyen ©efeH* fcftaften, my brother is a friend of numerous assem- blies. £a3 ©emcilbe ttelcM Sie frettmnbern ift twi emern J?unftler Uttferet $tit f the painting which you ad- mire is by a modern artist. ©ettrif*, ttnr fotmett nicfrt tt>eit nom x Sanbe fei)n, surely we cannot be far off the shore. granflin befeauptct r bie (Sttelfeit getyere 311 ben 2(n* nefymlicMciten be3 2e6en3, Franklin maintains vanity to belong to the sweets of life. 3u ber bcfttmmten 3?tt fterben nnv unS einfinben. , we shall be there at the time appointed. Wid) ju befucfyen mup metn gxeunb 3u SBaffcr unb 311 Saribe retfeil, to visit me ; my friend must travel by water and by land. (§6 ift angeneljm 311 gupe burdj bte <2dnt>ei$ ju retfen, it is agreeable to travel on foot through Switzerland. 3d) (abe micf) jum ■ griiftftucf bet 3$nen e * n > I in- vite myself to breakfast with you. Setnem Sfuftrage 3uf0hje r or h\\U[$c 4 feineS 3htf- tragg roerbe id) bte ©emalbe fcerfaufen laffen, m co/w- pliance with his request I shall cause the paintings to be sold. 35te »orgefc6Iagencn SRafiregeln ftnb bent Sntereffe beg SanbeS 3un>i&er 2 , the proposed measures are opposed to the interest of the country. 3)en ©efejjen 3uurifcer banbeht, to act contrary, or ?w opposition to the laws, 74 PREPOSITIONS. III. PREPOSITIONS REQUIRING THE ACCUSATIVE. turd) 1 , by, through. fur l , for. gegen , towards } against , to. o|iie, without. xrm, round , around, for. ttnber , against. Examples. Uurd) ben graven StfaU erful;r ic^ baj? ©te t)ter ftciren, ft# ^e greatest chance I heard that you were in town. Saffen Sie eg mid) imrd) etnen 3^er Wiener tinffen, let me know it by one of your servants. $late fiir ben dlzU cfyen , the sun shines for the poor as for the rich. ©qjen bte SJiitte ber 3^it roarb er beffer, towards the middle of the time he grew better. 3)a6 ^Pferb lief 0^en ben ©djlagbaum, the horse ran against the turnpike. 3)er ftafyre £>elb ift grofmuttfyig ^egeir fetnen fiber* tx^unbenen getnb , the true hero is generous to his vanquished enemy. ©t)tt£ bid) fann id) nidjt leben, without thee I can- not live. 9?arf) aufgefyobener ©t£ung serfammetten fie ficf> urn J mxd) '$ , fur'6 , stand for tuttcfy t>a$ , fiir ba$. PREPOSITIONS. 75 ben ©predjer be6 £aufe3, after the sitting was over they assembled round the speaker of the house. (Ir befummert fief) urn feinen SRetifc^en, he cares for no man. 2Ba6 Ktinen ©te tmtmr it)n fcorfmrtgett? what ca» you produce against him? IV. PREPOSITIONS REQUIRING THE DAT. OR ACC. an l , at , near 3 close , in , with , of. auf ! , on j upon. Winter J , behind. in \ in 5 into. neb en, near, next to. tiber 1 , over, above, at. unter J , below ? under } among. t>or , before , at. jtiufcben , between. IVB. Examples on the use of these prepositions will be found on other side, on opposite pages: one for the Da- tive, and the other for the Accusative; and it is hoped, sufficiently clear, to point out to the learner, when they govern the one or the other case. 1 These prepositions coalesce with the def. art. so as to represent sometimes the dative sometimes the accu- sative case ; as : am for an rem. an's for an baS. auf$ for auf bag. fjinter-m for Winter bem. im for in tern. tn'y for in \>a$. iibn'm for ufcet tent. nber'e for uBer tae. nntev'm for unrer tent. untcv'3 for unter ba^. <6 PREPOSITIONS. Note 1. These prepositions require the dative when they are intended to convey the idea of proximity , ad- herence , permanency , stability , locality , repose etc. ; and the accusative when they show a motion y ten- dency or direction towards a certain point. NB. Read also Note 2 j^* Examples. With the Dative. Xcv (StuM ftet)t an tor Sffianb , the chair stands near the wall. 2)er gute Sftenfd) rttmmt Jf)d( an tor gveube femes ■Webenmenfdjett , the good man participates in the joy of his fellow -creature (in what?) 3f)r SBrtcf Itegt an foem ^oftfenfter , your letter lies (is stuck up) at the post-office window (where?) 2)a3 (§t Itegt jerbrocfcett auf torn SBobett, the eg-g is lying broken on the ground (where?) 3)te 2)ad)becfer arbetten auf bent ^ad)c, the tilers are at work on the roof. 9)?cm mup biefc Sntfcfyetbung auf torn SBttfen bee gurften berufyett laffen, this decision must be left to rest on the pleasure of the sovereign (where ?) £ie 9£umcn be3 aftett ScMoffeo ftcJ)en l)tnt*r torn ©artett, the ruins of the old castle stand behind the garden (where?) 3)te 33ud&er (tegen in tor ^tfte, the books are (lying) in the box (where ?) Qx weip in fctnem |>erjen , bap cr mir Unrecbt tbut, he knows in his (own) heart that he wrongs me (where ?) PREPOSITIONS. 77 Note 2. In doubtful cases it may be useful to ask: where? whereat? whithin whom? whithin which or what! and it will be found that the phrase contain- ing the answer j requires the dative ; whereas the questions: whereto _, whereon in the sense of whither to whom, towards whom or what, will in their an- swer require the accusative. Examples. With the Accusative. 3d) ttnU ben gtuftl an bu 2Battb ftetfen, I will place the chair near the wall (near to where or whither ?) 2)enfen Ste an tu greube Sfyre ©Kern nneber ju fefyert, think of the joy of seeing your parents again (towards what?) 3)er SBrtcf tft an ton giirften gertcfytet, the letter is directed to the prince (to whom?) £a$ (St 5erbrtdf>t voetm e3 auf ton 23oben fdtft, the egg will break when it falls on the ground (where- on?) 2)ie 3)ad)betfer tragen 3^9^ au f ^^ 3)atf), the tilers are carrying tiles up the roof. £te Cmifefietbung bee ^rcjeffeg tft auf ben nacftften xOionat feftgefefet , the decision of the trial is fixed for next month (towards what ?) 3)iefer ^Sfab fufyrt \)\nUx bte^Ruinen beg attenScftloffeS, this path leads behind the ruins of the old castle (whither?) Segen ©ie bie 93iidher in Me ^ifte, put the books into the box (whereinto?) £ct<3 Unrecfyt fmbet feitten ©ngang in frin £>er$, injustice finds no access to his heart (whither?) 78 PREPOSITIONS. Dative. 2Ber fafj in ber So^e neb*tt Sljnen? who was sit- ting next to you in the box? ©djtt>m ©ennttenrolfen fycingen iib*r for ©tabt, heavy thunder -clouds are hanging over the town. SBafyrenb ber ^voceffion gteng ber Sifcfrof imter einem Sfyronfnmmel , during the procession the bishop walked under a canopy. |)unt ftatte fttele SlnMnger nnter fotn gemeinen SSoIfe, Hunt had many partisans among the common people. Vox font |)aufe fteftet eine 9vct^e SBaume, there is a row of trees before the house. 9Kit eblem Stolje ftcmb er twr hen fcerfammetten ^urften , with noble pride he stood before the as- sembled princes. 2)a3 £mb figt 3^ifrf)en tt)m unb feiner grau , the child sits between him and his wife. PREPOSITIONS. 79 Accusative. ©e§en Sie fidj auf bag Sofa tuktt mrine gran, sit down on the sofa next to my wife. Die ®mnttertt>o(fett ftnb ub*r Me ©tabt toeggejogen, the thunderclouds have passed over the town. 5)er SMfdjof gieng unter ten £konfmnmel unb bte ^roceffiott fefite ftcfc in Settegung, the bishop stepped under the canopy and the procession began to move. 3)aS SDWitar feuerie unUt fca0 2$olf, voabrenb |)imt ju Sftancfrefter eg anrebete , the military fired among the people when Hunt addressed them at Man- chester. Vox tnddK* btefer |>mtfer folfeti bte 33chtme gefe^t werbett? before which of these houses are the trees to be set? 93ttt eblem Stolje trat er vox fU fyn, with noble pride he stepped up before them. Sag $mb fann frequent imftytn fie gefe&t werben, the child can be very easily placed between them. 80 ADVERBS. 1. Every German adjective, when used as a pre- dicate, or when standing to define another ad- jective, becomes an adverb, in which case it has no particular form and remains undeclined. (See Adjs. Decl. II. Rs. 2 and 3) Ex : (§r tit £Mmiitl)nj unb benft on 3^bermann, he is gene? oils and thinks well of every body. Sim rtcicbften Sttorgen macMe id) mtcb kiiljn auf ben 23eg , I set boldly forward the next mor- ning*. Qx reitet aufter0r}>£itUid) i]\it , he rides remar- kably well. Sein ijpauv i)t an$ene\)m gelegen, his house is pleasantly situated. Qin unvexftelit befcfretbeneS 2)Mbtf)en, a girl un- affectedly modest. 2. The word SSetfe (manner) is sometimes added to substantives or adjectives when used adver- bially, corresponding to the English in, by or the adverbial termination ly, as: 3>ic geinbe fturjten ftf aarentun|> burcfr bag ge* rffnete 2f}or , the enemies rushed in hosts through the opened gate. 3d) will fie ntc&t bu^enbuinf* fonbern paaritfnfc faiifen , I will not buy them by the dozen but by the pair. @lucf[td)enDn)> wax bie 5{$iftole nicfrt gelaben, for- tunately the pistol was not loaded. 3. The letter 6 is also added to some substantives ADVERBS. 81 and adjectives to form adverbs of time and man- ner , as : 2)torgen8 , SKtttagS , 2ttenb3 , in the morning or of a morning, at noon, in the evening. 2)aS SBaffer Voatyzt tuftsin** , the water in- creases visibly. . Adjectives in the superlative degree with Ottf 6 (governing the ace.) and am or tm (gov. the dat.) are often used adverbially. Ex : (§r tfi i)on fehten greimbett auf8 glatt3*iii|l* 6e* U)trtf>ettr>orbeu, he has been entertained most splendidly by his friends. 2Ba£)rettt> metner Stetfen »cnt)ct(te tap am laiujftnt 1 in 3)eutfdf)(attb, during my journeys I stayed longest in Germany. 2)a3 betrifft mid) ntdjt im miitfcfieit ] , that does not concern me in the least. . Adverbs formed from the superlative as in the last rule, take sometimes only 3 without am, as : Ste fatten jtd) tn*niflfi*tis enifdjulbigen foUett, you ought to have at least excused yourself. All other kinds of adverbs 2 , that cannot be used attributively are found in the dictionary in the form in which they are to be used. 1 Vide Comp. of adjs. R. 5 and obs. 4. - For adverbs of number , see Ord. Numbers : erfte * 82 CONJUNCTIONS. CONJUNCTIONS. I. COPULATIVE. aucf), also, au^erbem, besides. bamit \ with. ncimltd), namely. nicfyt, not. t alleini nic^t, Mo3 not only. f mtr ) fonbern and) , but also. fott>of)(, as well. tf)ett§, partly. unb, and. Weber . . . nod) , neither . . . nor. II. CONDITIONAL AND ARGUMENTATIVE. aber, but. allem , but , however. alfo, consequently, therefore. bat)er, hence. bamt, then. , J ' therefore, on that account. befwegett, ) ' barum, i for that reason. bemnad), bod), yet, however. 1 This conj. when standing before the verb, governs the potential mood, as; bamit er ftd) tticftt $etle|e, that he may not hurt himself. INTERJECTIONS. 83 beffetmngeac()tet , notwithstanding, entoeber . . . ober, either . . . or. folgltclj) , consequently. gletcfywofyi , yet. fyhtgegen, in return, consequently. v , J f > however. mbeffen, \ , ' consequently, therefore. fottft, else, otherwise. INTERJECTIONS. ad)\ af)l ah! alas! dfyal aha! an ! an it>ef> ! ] ah ! oh ! et or ei; ! cv ! t)a! ha! fye ! t)e ba ! hallo ! ()et[a! huzza! ^o! f)oIfa! ho hallo! fym! hem! fyufcf)! hush! jltcfye, jxt^e ! hurra! o, of)! oh! olja! hold! ofyo ! oho! tt>ef) ! o dear. pfui! fie! wef)! woe! 1 Expression of excessive pain of body or mind. 6. 84 VERBS. VERBS AND PRACTICAL PART OF GRAMMAR illustrated by exercises on the foregoing parts of speech with application of the rules relating to them. I. THE PRINCIPAL AUXILIARIES ARE : Infinitive. 1 ©em, to be «£)aktt, to have SBerben, to become Participles. Present. fei enb, being J)ab enb, having Past. ge ft>ef en , been ge fyab t , had Present. fterbenb, becoming 2 gett)orbett, become [ndicati !>e. Subjunctive. 3* bin fyab e fretbe fei fyab e toerb e i ain have become am or be 5 have 5 become 5 ®u btfi w toivji feice)ft ^aB efi tterb eji thou art hast becomest art or be have becomest @r 3 m fjat nntb fei tyab e toerb e he is has ' becomes is or be have become 2Str ftnb l)ab en toetb en fet(e)n tyaben toetb en we are have become are or be have become 3^* fetb fjab(e)t 4 fterb et (ei(e)b ^ah(t)t foerb et you are have become are or be have become @ie ftnb J^ob en toerb en fei(e)n Ijab en toerb en they are have become are or be have become 1 Also spelled fefyn through all persons and tenses. 2 Also ftorben in compound past tenses of the passive voice. 3 In this as in all other conjugations it is to be under- stood that the third person comprises also: jte, e3 and man, she, it, one. 4 Wherever the e is enclosed, it may be omitted, which in colloquial discourse is mostly done. VERBS. 85 Imperfect. Indicative. Subjunctive. 3d) tear §at te trurb e b tear e 3 fyatte 5 teiirb e I was had became was or were had became 5 ©11 tear ft I^attejttenrbefl irdr(e)ft fyat teft teiirb t\t f/*ow wast hadst becamest wast or wert hadst becamest (gfr tear fyat te trurb e te&re f)dt te teiirb e A# was had became was or were had became a^tt tear en t;attentenrben tear en Jjctt tm teiirb en we were had became were had became 3^t i»arce)t l)at tet toutb et tear et fyat Ut teiirb et ,yow were had became were had became ®ie tear en $at Un trurb en tear en f?dt Un teiirb en £/*£# were had became were had became Imperative, fet (m) l)aB (e) bn teerb e (bn) be thou have thou become thou fei er i)ae e er teerb e er let Mm be let him have let him become feib (ir,r) $afc (e) t (tyr) teerb et be, or do ye be have, do ye have become, or etc. fein fie * ^ab en fie * toerb en jte * let them be let them have let them become COMPOUND TENSES. Infinitive - Past. geteefen fein to have been Cbeen to be) gel) ah J)a£en to have had Chad to have) geteorben fein to have become (become to be) 5 If or that generally precede the pers. pron. iu English to give expression to the Subj., thus: if or that I am or be etc. Imp erf. if or that I was or were etc. In English this mood is called Potential when preceded by may or can; as: I may or can be. Imperf. J might or could be etc. s Also, in the singular only, icr) tearb, bu iearbji, enearb. * v- Pers. Pron. R. 1 and obs. 3. 86 VERBS. Perfect or Comp. of the Pres. and P. Part. ftiff. 3$ ^ n S«totfen tyabe gefyabt bin getoorben / have been have had have become ®u feifl getoefen fja# ge'ija&t bift genwrben Mow hast been hast had hast become etc. etc. etc. Subj. 3$ f^ ge^efen tjabe gefjabt fet getoorben T have or may* have or may have have ormayhave have been had become •£u feift getvefen 'ijabefl; geljafct feift gefrovben £&ott hast or mayst hast or mayst hast or mayst have been have had have become etc. etc. etc. Pluperfect or Comp. of the Imp erf. and P. Part. Ind. 3$ toargeftefen Ijcttte gefyabt wax gefrorben I had been had had had become 55u \vax]t ^wqcn Ijatteft geftctbt Waxft gefcorben thou hadstbeen hadst had hadst become etc. etc. etc. Snhj. 3^f) ifare getoefen l)atte ge$aBt ftave getootben I might y have might -J- have might y have be- been - had come £>tt todrep getoefen ij&tteft gefjabt todrefl getoorben ftoi mightst have mightsthave had mightst have be- been etc. come etc. etc. Future - Infinitive or Comp. of the Pres. oftvevbenandlnf. of other verbs. Ind. 3$ totetbe Kin frerbe Jjofccn n>erbe fterben J shall be shall have shall become Qu tiurjl fein trtrft fjaben uurft toerben £/* err e trerren shall become iv err eft roerbeu wilt become etc. Past en and Inf. Past trerre getootben kin shaUhave become 7 nurft genuurenfetn wilt have become etc. tterrc genuurenfetn shall have become toetbejfcgetoorbenfeui wilt have become etc. Conditional — Infinitive or Compound of the Imp. Subj. of merbett and Inf. of other verbs. 3$ tourbe fein I" should * be ©U nutrb eft fein thou wouldst -'° ;< be @t* uutrre fein he would be nutrre bab en should* have nutrreft babm wouldst ** have uutrre fcabcn would have uutrre Kerb en should * become nutrreil nuuren wouldst ** become uutrre irerren would become : Literally: shall been to be^ shall become to be; the par- ticiple being always placed in Germ, before the Infin. * or would. ** or shouldst. 88 VERBS. 3Btr toiivben fein toikben ftaben unttben toetben we should be should have should become 3ftt toitrbet fein tontbet tyaBen toiirbet toerben you would be would have would become ®ie toitrben fein toiitben f) often ttittben toevben they would be would have would become Conditional - — Infinitive — Past or Compound of the Imp. Subj. of Werbett and Inf. Past of other verbs. 3d) ftitrbe getoefen ttitrbe gefyabt ^aBen toitrbe getoorben fein fein I shouldhave been should have had should have become ©tt ttmtbeftgetoefen toitrbejl getyafct ^ctBen toiubeft gettorben fein fein thou wouldst have wouldst have had wouldst have become been (gtnntrbegetoefenfem foiirbe gefyaBt fyabtn toitrbe getoovben fein he would have been would have had would have become SSirnnttbengetoefen toitrben geljafct Ijafcen ftritrbengehwbenfein fein we shouldhave been should have had should have become 3f)£ toiirbet geftefen toiirbet geljabt fyaBen toitrbet getoorben fein fein you would havebeen would have had would have become @ie toixrben getoefen umrbengefyaBtfjaBen toitvben genwben fein fein they would have would have had would have become been Exercise I. Note. To find the gender of the nouns refer to the rules P. 15, and for the declensions to the Table P. 25 ; not to forget to consult the Appendix as to the noun being an exception or not. Whenever a preposition occurs, refer to the rules on their government. This country is very flat. — I am very tired. — Scmb fefyr flarf) mitbe VERBS. 89 Thou art at table. — She is at home. —We have bei £tfdj $u |>aufe a fine view from here. — Where is your J room ? fyubfdje 3toSjtdjt f)tet 2£o 3immer What 2 number is it ? — It is on the first floor. — Summer /. cmf Stocf I am the coachman. — Are 3 you 4 the guard ? — ^utfcfcer Svonbufteur Are the horses put to ? — Have 5 you my trunk , ^Sferb n. cmgefycmnt Coffer portmanteau and carpetbag? — They are at the 9ftcmtelfacf m. Steifefacf auf coach office. I thought they were 6 at the inn. — spoftbureau n. bacfyte in ©aftfyauS They were in your room, but they are no 7 more ni$)t mzijx there. — What 8 river is that? 9 — We are 10 travel- ba reifcit 1 What has been said of the Pers. Pron. P. 40, R. 1 and obs. 3, is also applicable to the Poss, Pron., i. e. to take the third instead of the second person pi. - Interr. Pron. P. 55. 3 Interrogatively, the verb precedes the pronoun. * V. Pers. Pron. P. 40. R. 1. 5 «§oben, governs the object in the accusative. 6 That , being understood though not expressed, shows this tense to be of the Potential, and in Germ, of the Sub- iunctive mood. 7 Whenever the negation (no or not) refers to the verb it is translated by nidjt , but when to the object, con- stituting an absence of quality — by fern. 8 P. 56. R. 3. 9 P. 48. neut. Gend. of feer , and R. 2 as far as the full stop. J0 The verb to be before the Part. Pres. of any verb, 90 VERBS. ling at a very slow (rate). — What J ■ have we to Icmgfam SSte *>iel ju pay ? — You have to pay ] 2 eighteen guilders eight b^aijkn ©ulbett stivers (in Holland). This is in Germany eighteen Stii&er fSeutfdjlcmb florins twenty four Kreuzer. Each florin is one ©ulbett (gcpmcj) and eight pence English. Gmgitfd). Exercise II. Where were you? I was at the post office. Had Srtefyofl you any J letters there — there 2 were none for me fein (there), were there 3 any for you? Have there ba deleft must not be rendered in German, the principal verb only being translated in the Tense 9 Person and Numb, of the accompanying auxiliary to be. 11 Stands here for: hoic much. 12 The Inf. which is governed by another verb, is put at the end of the sentence. 1 Not translated in a partitive sense , except when re- lating to a subst. V. P. 30, R. 4. and Ex. P. 60. 2 P. 44, R. 11. 1 In interrog. sentences this adv. is placed last, except there be a Past Part. , in wh. case this closes the sen- tence, with ba before it. VERBS. 91 been 3 any for them. I have had 4 two letters from Paris. (I dare say 5 )^ I shall 6 have * some to ttjafyrfcfieinlicfy 6 etntge morrow 7 . — Have you had any * London 8 papers? Settling The mail is not yet 9 arrived. Be 10 here in proper nocf* cmgefommen I)ter jur redjt time to morrow. — Have 10 change about you 1J , you 3cit morgett 9Jttm$e bet will have ** your bill. — What has become 4 of Stemming wa$ au§ him ? What will become ** of these children? Theref 3tmb n. 4 The Past Part, stands after the object, or at the end of the sentence, which is always preferred in short sentences 5 and in compound sentences at the end of the first part. 5 Anglicism. 6 Probably, The sentence opening with an adverb (or ad- versative phrase) causes the finite or inflected part of the verb to stand before its Nominative. * V. Exerc. I. obs. 12. 7 In a phrase of direct order, the adv. follows the verb, or the first part of the verb if a compound tense $ but in one of indirect order, as here, it follows the Norn. See the cause of the iud. order in obs. 6. s P. 31, R. 6. 9 Always precedes not. 10 You being rendered in Germ, by they, when adres- sing individuals, it must always follow the Imper. in Germ, though not expressed in Engl. V. P. 40, R. 1 and obs. 3, 11 P. 40, R. 1 and P. 39, obs. 2. ** Exerc. 1 , obs. 12. f P. 44, R. 11. 92 VERBS. has been a great difference among these persons. Unemigfett ^erfott/ 7 . The journey will not be very agreeable I2 on that fet>r mtgenefym auf road. — You have your choice between two dif- 9Beg m. $Qaf)l f. jwifrfjen t)er^ ferent roads. — It is the same to me 13 . (c^iebeit emerlet Exercise Ilia Have* patience friend. — I am not impatient. — ©ebulb ungebulbig Indeed you are \ — Am I x indeed? — Is this 2 a ttafyrlid) ttnrflitf) palace, a house , a castle? What is it? Have you |>au8 n. @dj}lo{* n. a watch ? What ** o'clock is it. — It will presently Vfyxf. W)X be f two. — It is past two. — In what place were nad) £>rt 12 P. 30, R. 3. 13 The Dat. follows the verb fettt. * V. Exerc. II. obs. 10. 1 In Germ, the Predicate — either participle, adjective, adv. or even verb — cannot be understood by the mere refe- rence of the auxiliary to the foregoing sentence; but must be repeated in full or represented by e$ Cso, P. 44, R. 11)^ or in intern sentences answered by jet Cyes^ or neitt (no). 2 In speaking of, or referring to things generally, the neuter Demonstr. Pron. of bev must be used. See also Exer- cise I. obs. 9. ** Exerc. I., obs. 11. j Exerc. I., obs. 12. VERBS. 93 you last night. — I wish I was * still at the same gejiern 9?ad)t wiinfdje no* in place. — They 3 have a capital table there f f , good •DortreffXidE) 5£ifdE) /^. bort eating 4 , good drinking , excellent beds and very ZxlnUn sortrefflicfy Sett n. good attendance. — They are also reasonable in SBebiemmg aud) Mttig their prices. *Prei3 m. Exercise IV- I was not so lucky. — I had bad rooms at my glucflid). fcfytedjt inn. — The dinner was not worth ] a penny. — ©ajifyofm. aRittagcffen ttertf) pfennig The wine was very bad ; and the attendance still ttocfy worse 2 ; but the worst 3 of all was the bill. How much have you had * to pay. Here is the bill — * Exerc. I., obs. 6. 3 P. 40 „mcm." Note that this pronoun requires the verb in the sing, though it might be represented in Engl, by a Nom. Plur. 77 Exerc. II. , obs. 7. 4 P. 16, R. 5. 1 This adj. governs sometimes the Ace., sometimes the Gen. case of the qualifying word and its attributes, and stands always after it. In this instance it gov. the Ace. 2 P. 34, R. 2. 3 P. 35 , R. 5 and obs. 4. * Exerc. II. , obs. 4. 94 VERBS. thirty odd 4 florins. Have you been * at the picture- in ©emalbe- gallery ? Yes I have 5 . — Have they f a museum ©attette/. aJtofeumw. here? they have f f, it is in the same building as the ©ebaube^. al6 Grand-Ducal library. — But I have seen a different grofiljerjogUcf} 33iMtotIjef f. aber anber building with that name written over it 6 . — Oh ! mit 9£ame m. gefd^riebett auf that is a club of 7 that name ; the (gefcfyloffene) ©efettfctyaft 9kme m. principal club of almost every city in Germany angefeljenjl tf on be inafye jeber 8 ©tab* f. is called so. Exercise V. What ! a singular name. It seems it has become fonberbctr fdjemt the fashion in Germany. — Are there * any ** read- STOobe Sefe- ing - rooms. — What papers have they there. — 4 V. P. 65 , obs. 5. 5 Scil. been there. V. Exerc. III., obs. i. f Exerc. III. obs. 3. -J—j- Seil. one. Exerc. III. obs. 1. 6 P. 43 , R. 10. 7 Gen. of the Demonstr. Pron< 8 P. 58 and obs. 16. 1 P. 55 Interr. Prons. and P. 57, R. 5. * Exerc. II. obs. 7. ** Exerc. II. , obs. 1. VERBS. 95 They have most 2 French ; German and one Eng- franjojifd) beutfdj cng^ lish 3 there. Have you been f at the theatre. — We lifdf) in Skater have. — In what place were you? Pit, boxes parterre n. Soge or stalls *. — I have not yet ** been f there. She ©perrftfc will be there 4 to morrow 4 evening 4 . — Have you seats ? — If not 5 , we shall be f f at a loss 6 . — spiafc m. in 93erlegen!jeit 2 V. Comp. of adjs. Note, that the article must be given in German, except when speaking* of things geuerally. This example may serve as an instance where the art. must stand. 1 Sell. Paper (Settling) , or „one." V. P. 30, R* 4. -J* Exerc. II. . obs* 4. * Rows of benches parted off from the pit and divided by numbered seats moving upon hinges, turned back and secured by a lock to the railing. They are let down as soon as the bearer of the ticket presents himself. By far the most comfortable seat in the house. *%■ Exerc. II. , obs. 9. 4 Adverb of time precedes that of place. 5 Seil. then. This conjunction as weU as so, intended to link tAvo parts of a sentence, is almost always omit- ted in English. In German the omission is a matter of taste. The learner, until he has acquired that taste by reading, should always use these conjunctions. The verb in the second link of such sentences must pre- cede its Nominative ; and this is the case, whenever the first part of the sentence opens with a conjunction or an adverb , expressing a condition, supposition etc. ■j-J- Exerc. I. , obs. 12. 6 Anglicism. 96 VERBS. There 7 will be a great throng. How numerous grop ©ebtdng 8 tt)ie $at)(retd) will our company be ? We shall not be ff many. ©efellfc^aft There 7 will be sufficient of us 9 to 10 have a box to genug urn ju fur ourselves. Exercise VI. It has become too late to * think of going 1 there. $u fyat urn ju bettfen an'S fymgefyen. Another time ** you should f be j f more punctu- eitt anber folftett ^unft(td) 7 P. 44. R. 11 8 Neut. Gend. R. 3. g P. 38, obs. 1. 10 The preposition to before the Infinitive is always translated by „um $u," whenever the words „in order to" may, with any propriety, be placed before the Infin. „um" opens the sentence, „£U" accompanies the Infin. t Exerc. V. obs. 10. 1 The Pres. Part, of English verbs preceded by a pre- position, is rendered in German by the Inf. with „$u" before it, and is placed at the end of the sentence; sometimes also by a verbal noun in the neut. gend. if the placing of the def. art. before it in Engl, does not destroy the sense. ** P. 64. Rs. 1 and 2. -J* Exerc. II. obs. 6. -|~j* Exerc. I. obs. 12. VERBS. 97 al ♦. We should have had 2 an opportunity of be- ©elegenfyeit ing ! present 3 at the first representation of the new jugegcu bet 3(uful)runcj neu opera. — It has become ** the fashion to wait £>per f till the best part , the overture is 4 over. — Ma- 6i8 4 %b)d\m. Ou&erture/. fcoriibcr ny people like to become conspicuous 3 by the Seutc lieben bcmerfbar neglect of (that 5 ) what 6 is 6 real good taste. — aSernad;Idfftgung voaty @cfcf)macf m. * p. 34. R. 2. 2 V. Verbs P. 87. obs 7. Inf. Past stands at the end of the first part of the sentence. 3 Adverbs standing with an Inf. must precede it. ** Exerc. II. obs. 4. 4 auf bafi ) mbern , whilst bamtt j inorder t0 nacr,tem, after al$, when, as. ob , whether bettor j fett, since efje ^ be f° re fo^ctlb , as soon as bi$ , till trdfyrenb, whilst ba , as warm , when t>a$ , that roeil , because falls, in case roemt, if gleicfyrine, however too, where and a few more conjunctions and adversative expressions cause the verb to stand last. If the tense is compound , the inflected part stands last. 5 Neut. of ber, Demonstr.-Rel. Prons. what relatively, stands in Engl, properly for that which , and in this sense it must be rendered in Germ. 6 Relative Prons. remove the verb to the end of the sentence ; if compound , the inflected part stands last. 7 One would become more rational by being 7 (if 1 one tternimftig tt>etm man were l ) less ambitious. — Whatever* he may be, ware rfjvgetjtg he is no poet. It may be ever so true , he will be Stricter nod) wafyr deaf to your admonitions. Be ever the friend of tauh gegen (§rmctf)nimg immer the weak and the defenceless. — He might have efymfy** 2Bef)tlcfe** become *** much more celebrated if 4 he had 8 been 4 ttiel berufymt less profuse in works of this kind. nunber ergiebig SBerf n. Slrt f. Exercise VII- If* one was** contented with whatf one has, jufrieben fo one would have ft enough. — If* I had ** been * in genug * V. P. 54, R. 3. 7 Whenever one of the tenses in the Potential mood with if before it, can be substituted for the Pres. Part, of the English verb, it must be rendered in Germ, by the subjunctive, as illustrated here. ** V. P. 30. R. 5. *** Exerc. 2, obs. 4. s The verb governed by „%ff c is in the subjunctive mood. * Exerc. ** Exerc. VI. , obs. 8. f Exerc. VI., obs. 5. j -j- Exerc. V., obs. 5 and note that if the verb is compoun- ded, the inflected part of the verb only precedes the Nom. VERBS- 99 your situation ft, I. am sure with l your means I Sage fo gewi^ Sftttteln should have been* much more successful. — It glmflidj depends in what ** country you have ** been. I Mngt bat) on ah should have *** long become * tired of this work, langft mfibe 2 Arbeit were it not my wish to become *** useful 3 to the SButtfd) m. travelling community. — How long have you reifenb spubltfum n. been i in this country ? I have been 4 here since 1 This preposition connects the concluding part of the sentence j which ought properly to be done by „thatf c in which case the construction of that part of the sen- tence would follow, as in obs. 4, Exerc. 6; but by trans- lating* merely the preposition „with", the following verb must stand before the Nominative. If the verb is com- pounded, the inflected part only stands before the Norn, and the other parts at the end of the sentence. * V. Verbs P. 87, obs. 7. ** Exerc. VI., obs. 6. *** Exerc. I. , obs. 12. - This adj. generally follows the subs. 3 The adject, or adverb defining an Inf. goes with it to the end of the sentence but stands before the Inf. 4 Must be rendered by the present tense, which is al- ways the case in German, when the Perfect of an Engl, verb shows the present state of being or acting. The following examples may serve to illustrate this rule more clearly : Have you been long waiting for me ? ) if the person is still Sctvten eie fdjoti fonge auf midj ? j waiting. 7 . 100 VERBS. last spring. — As for me 5 ; I have 4 not been 4 long grufyjafyr (was mid) betrtfft) 6 (nod) nidjt) langc here. — What are the best news in England? Sftcutgfeit Why 7 I have no great stock of 8 news — things 93orratf) alleS are much the same as when you were * there — (s) fo jiemlidj aW ba * except 9 we have lately had some good sport in auSgenommm t>or$urjem ©pap Parliament. — I wish 10 you had been there , you sparlament nnmfcfie would have had an opportunity of shining ** in @e(cgenl)eit 511 glcinjen the debate ? especially as * it was on the corn- 2)ebatte bcfonberS ufcer Sent* laws, this would have been on your favourite to- gefefc n. fiber 8iebling8*©e* Have you lived here long ? i an c *~- r^ r! * r •- . 9 J if still living at the same place. SBofynen @te fdjon lange qier? j ® A We have been looking for you this half hour ) in the act of 3©ir fitcften erbe loben , I shall praise praise £n ttrirfi loben, thou wilt Dnwerbeft loben, thou wilt praise etc. praise etc. VERBS. 103 Future- Infinitive - Past or Comp. of the Pres. of SBerben and Inf. Past of present verb. Lid. Subj. 3d) werbe gelobt fjaben, I 3d) tterbe gelobt tyaben, I shall have praised shall have praised -Xinxnrftgelo6tf)a6ett,thou S)u rcerbeft gelobt fjtibm, wilt have praised thou wilt have praised etc. etc. Con ditto n al- Infinitiv e or Comp. of the Imp. Subj. of SBerben and Inf. of present verb. 3d) ftnirbe (obett, I should The same form. praise Du n>iirbeft loben, thou wouldst praise etc. Conditional -Infinitive -Past or Compound of the Imp. Subj, of SBerben and Inf. Past of present verb. 3d) uu'irbe gelobt baben, I The same form. should have praised 3)u ftmrbeft gelobt Ijaben, tliou wouldst have praised etc. Exercise VIII. I requested ■ that gentleman to exchange .seats erfudjen tt>edjfeto &tym. ' All active (transitive) verbs govern (he object in the accusative. 104 VERBS. with me. I thank you for your kind attentions. — banfen 2 guttg 3Iufmerffamfett(«.) You thank more than this little attention deserves. tferbtenen Shall we soon reach the next stage ? — In half * balb erretd)en Station f. an hour we shall 3 have reached it 4 . You may al- fonnen ready hear the ringing of the bells in the next vil- fdjon Iduten ** lage. Did 5 you hear that noise ? I did 5 not hear fyoretx Sdrm m. it 4 . — As soon as we arrive there, I shall ft ask fo balb a!8 f anfommen bort beftellen 2 £anfen, gefcen, fagen (to thank , give, say) and other verbs of a similar kind , have one subst. in the dat. and the other in the ace, or the dat. of the person, connec- ted to the object by means of a preposition. * P. 65, obs. 4.' 3 In a phrase of indirect order the verb must be placed before its nom. (The direct order would be: We shall have reached it in half an hour J 4 The pronoun must agree in gender and number with the noun it relates to. ** ,,To ring" P. 16. , R. 5 and Note P. 17. 1 The verb „to do" is never translated in German when used for negative or interrogative assertions ; as : id) fyore, f)6re ic&? id) fjcre ntdjt, fyore id) nid)t? I hear, do I hear? I do not hear, do I not hear? the same with the Imperfect aud Imperative, f Exerc. VI. , obs. 4. f-f Exerc. V. , obs. 5 (second part). VERBS. 105 for a post-chaise. — He does not hear what you (grtrci^cft f. say, do you not hear my friend? What do you want ? I wanted a glass of water. I shall bring Derlangen tiumfdjen ®la&n. brutgett you one * directly. May I offer 2 you one * also , fogletcfi barf anbietett Madam ? Did you say you wished for a glass of rtumfcr-en suoar-water. I do not wish for any thing:. — How 3ucfer nicijtg long will the coach 6 stop here? It generally ** bleiben stops here half an hour to *** allow 2 (us) time for (affen jum dinner. — When 7 the coach comes late 77, it SJttttageflen does not stop so long. — Do you travel farther rtuntev gentlemen? — We shall not travel farther — we meine |)erren shall stay here. — I expected 777 we should have bletben enrarten * P. 30, R. 4. 8 Jhttfcfee , SOBagen ; but those for the conveyance of pas- sengers, (fiRoagtttf ^ofttoagen , m. *♦ V. Exerc. II. , obs. 6 and 7. *** Exerc. Y. , obs. 10. 7 Exerc. VI. . obs. 4. 77 Exerc. Y. , obs. 5. V77 Scil. that and Exerc. VI. , obs, 4. 106 VERBS. the pleasure of your company all the way. — We SBergnugen n. gatt$ * expect to meet ** (with) some friends here. — jufammen ju treffen mit etnig If it is agreeable to you we will dine together. Exercise IX. Put * the bottle here. Your friend has put ** it ftetten giaf(^e on the other table. He did not put it on the table. We ordered also a glass of brandy. — I shall get kfielfenaucft Sranntftem fyolett it directly. Do not get * it yet ***. — He wishes fog(etcf) to dine. — Do the ladies wish j to dine also? Shall J I lay the cloth ff ■ You may lay the cloth. I foil ben £ifdj becfen ftt fotmeit have laid the cloth. The cloth is laid in the next nacr/ft room. — Shall \ I fill your glass. He fills his glass full en * P. 65, obs. 4. ** Exerc. I. , obs. 12. * Exerc. II. , obs. 10. ** Exerc. II. _, obs. 4. *** Exerc. II., obs. 9. y Exerc. I., obs. 3 and note that this is the case with the Nominative generally. 1 Shall is translanted by Herbert , when implying the Future , but by follcn , when implying necessity or obli- gation. ff 2>a3 f&tffy) Xudj auflegen. "i — I — i" Li^rally : To cover the table. VERBS. 107 also. Fill it again. — Can I have the pleasure of ttneber faun taking* a glass of wine with you. I will pledge SBefcfceib tljxnx you **. How do you like this wine. I like it tote fcfymecfm - very well. Do you like it Sir? I have never gut mem |) err nie tasted better. I thought you f had tasted this wine foften bacfyte before. This is the first time that I taste it. This red fritter bap Hock tastes like Claret. — Let us finish f f 9ft)etMDein fdjmecfen ttne Sorbeaimwm leerenftt this bottle and pay our bill. Waiter bring § the bill. What §§ does it amount to, it amounts to betragen eight florins and thirty eight kreutzer. I have no change ? Avill you pay for me ? Here is the money * Exerc. VI., obs. 1. ** Exerc. VIII., obs. 2. 3 (Mitten, glittfen, gerctt'fjett, gcbei^en Cto succeed), fe^tfd;ta- gen Cnot to succeed, to miscarry) fdfjmecfen (to taste, to like) require the Nom. of the Engl, verb to be turned into the l)at. in Germ, and the objective into the Nom. as : $8te fdjmecft Jtjnm fcuftr 2£em ? €r fdfnnecft mir fefyv. gut. y Exerc. I. , obs. 6 and Exerc. VI. , obs. 4. yy @nben, enbigen. J ; J ;\ Literally : to empty. § Exerc. II. , obs. 10. §§ Exerc, I. , obs. 11, 108 VERBS. waiter. I shall now 3 leave you \ Do not leave me s je£t t>erlaffen yet 3 . You see our friend has left us, and I should fefyen t>crlaffen be alone, afletn Exercise X. I must go , will you not * accompany me ? * I gefyen begleiten wish to find out a good tailor. Well I wish also rtltSjttfttt&ett to have some things and will 1 accompany you. — mil Waiter can you recommend us 2 a good tailor ? — empfefylen ©c^neiber I shall send you 2 the landlord gentlemen, he ©aftnnrtf) meine £)errert will be able to recommend you one. — Does he im ©tanbe live far from here? He does not live far from wofynen nmt here. — There ** live two tailors in the same street. 3 Oblique cases ^ being personal pronouns precede the adverb. Compare also Exerc, II. , obs. 7. * Exerc. IX. , obs. 3. 1 Will is translated by too Ken, when not implying the Future. 2 The Dat. is generally placed before the Ace. and Exerc. IX. , obs. 2. ** P. 44. R. 11 applicable to several neuter verbs. VERBS. 109 it is the first 3 you see * from here. Did you say ** it was that house ? We are very much 4 obliged t>erbunben to you. Here we are f . How soon can you make 2)q a suit of clothes for each of us? ff I suppose you t>oftftant>iger Stnsug wafyrfdjemltcfy ttt mean coat, waistcoat and trowsers. Exactly so SBefte |)ofen 3a ttofjl I shall be happy to furnish you the clothes § you ((§§ foU mid) freuen) liefern £(etber require, and at very reasonable prices. But till tterlangen ju bitfig ?$xti$m. MS when can you get them §§ ready? §* I shall have fyabett bereit them ready §* by Sunday next 5 . That will be too hU late, for we shall only stay till thursday 6 . You fpcit bemt nur fyier bleiben SDonnerftag. 3 Sell. whom. The relat. pron. is often left out in Engl, but must be rendered in German. * Exerc. VI. , obs. 6< ** Exerc. I. , obs. 6. * Much j preceded by very , before a Past Part, is not translated. y Exerc. II. , obs. 6. 7Y P. 38, Pers. Pron. and obs. 1. YY7 Literally: probably. Vide also Exerc. II., obs 5 # 6. § Scil. which. Vide obs. 3 and * §§ P. 51. Demonstr. abs. Pron. R. 3. g* Exerc. VII. , obs. 3. 5 The defining word precedes the defined. The days of the week: (Soitntag, SRontag , SMenftag , liO VERBS. have still two days to do them in. Well gentle- nod) urn fie ju tterferttgert $l\m men if it must* be *% I will try to do what I can. mmx mu£ fcerfucfyen faun Your own interest will require you to do so. 3ntereffe n. (@te baju aufforbern). Exercise XI. Do you not also want a cloak? I do not * want aucf) braudKti Mantel fetn one \ but my friend will want one. Shall I make macfyen one for you of this excellent blue cloth ? I do not au3 twtreffUd) Man 2!ud) n. think that ** this cloth is 2 strong enough. — You glauben ftarf gemtg (Siefott* may choose another Sir; here are a great nen fid)) tt>dblen em anbcr f ift variety. — Have you chosen this dark yy green ? Sbtdwo^I/. wafyUn bunfel gvun § Wlitttuofy, Stotmetjlag, grettag, (Samfiag; for the latter, they frequently say in northern Germany: ©onncifceiib. * Exerc. VI. , obs. 4. ** Scil. then, Exerc. V. obs. 5. * Exerc, I. , obs. 7. 1 $eht, means nicfyt em. ** Exerc. VI. , obs. 4. 2 The assertion being related as a fact, the verb" stands in the Indicative mood, tho preceeded by „that, t€ f Adjs. P. 30, R. 4. ft Decl. of Adjs. P. 30, R. 2. § P. 29, R. i. VERBS. 1 1 1 I have not f yet chosen any *. Show ** me fern jeigen some more 3 . — John fetch some other pieces _of timypl. nod) f* 3ol)ann hokn ember Stud n. cloth. Your brother and his friend chose this colour. garbe Very well,, I will choose the same. — Can you recommend us a good bootmaker. — I will send ©tiefelmadfyer 4 (Men for him. Are you the shoemaker. I want several laffert) tnefyrere pairs of boots and shoes. — Do you want them QfiaaxnT gtiefel <5d)vif)m. nounfcfyeit light§ or heavy §. I do not §§ wear heavy boots leidjt fdjwr I shall also want a pair of boots with cork- soles. $orffo£)(e Will you take the measure? Please to take a seat, netjmen SBtayn: gefafltgfi (ftcf) fc&en §§§) Make them very easy. Have you ever made §* any frequent jemalS ttoeld) of this shape. We do not make them of this shape fcon ftoxxnf. * P. 58; also P. 60, Ex. 3. ** Exerc. VIII. , obs. 2. 3 Precedes some. * <&<$)ulmafytx (shoemaker) is more generally used. *j-* Exerc. X., obs. 5. § Adjs. P. 30, R. 3. §§ Exerc. 1 , obs. 7. §§§ <£e$en ®ie ftcfy gef&Uigjt §* Exerc. II. , obs. 4. 112 VERBS. in this country , but if * you wish 7 I can f f Sanb fo ft make them just the same. Then you will make ebett fo them exactly like these, genau nne Exercise XII. How many pair of shoes did you say * you facjen wished to have. I only ** wish to have two pair. How many has your friend ordered. He did not 7 befiellett order any f . Did he not order any? 1 thought he glauben had ordered some. Where do you stay Sir? We (ogiren stay at the Baden Hotel ; and we shall only stay hit ft 8abifcfyen£ofw. bleiben in this place till the day after to morrow. Let us Dxtm. ■ ( itbermorgett § ) now T return to the hotel y I should like to send juriitf fefyrett nadt) u>finfd)en fcfyicfen, some linen to the laundress. I am rather short Seittenjeugju 2Bdfrf)erm etwaS furj * Exerc. VI. } obs. 4. 7 Scil. it. 77 Exerc. V. , obs. 5. * Scil. that Vide also Exerc. VI. ? obs. 4. ** Exerc. II., obs. 7, first part. 7 P. 30 , B. 4. and P. 58 ; also P. 60 , Ex. 3. 77 P. 75, obs. 1. § Literally : over to morroiv. VERBS. 113 of clean shirts , cravats and pocket handkerchiefs. an rein $zmbn. £al6tud) £afd)entud) Tell $ my servant to send for her. Did you tell Sebfenter (ntfen $u lafien) her that * I must * have every thing by to mor- alleS bid row ? I did §§ Sir. — Now go to the police for my auf Spotijei passport, and get it signed by the French and sjSap w. (ajfett tufiren tton fran^oftfcf) Dutch Ambassador. There §§§ are no Ambassadors fyotldnbifcfy ©efanbtcr resident here, only Charges d'affaires, and I doubt woljnett ©efdjafiStrager jweifeln whether f France has one here. — Did you travel ob granfrad) by way of France or Holland. We did not travel fiber through either. l We travelled through Belgium. We Selflien shall now travel to Paris, and as they intend also itadj twrfjabcn to travel thither, jj we may perform the journey bortfym fomtenmadjen together. jufammen. $ Exerc. VIII. , obs. 2. §§ Exerc. III. , obs. 1. S§§ P. 44, R. 11. 7 Exerc. VI. , obs. 4. 1 After the verb in the negative, translated the same as neither in obs. 20, P. 60 with the verb affirmatively. 7Y Scil. so. Exerc. V. 9 obs. 5. 8 114 VERBS. gclobt PASSIVE VOICE. The verb To be when used to form the passive conjugation of an active (transitive) verb must be rendered in German by the auxiliary SBerben. Infinitive. ©elo&t Werbett l , to be praised. Present. Indicative. Subjunctive. 3d) fterbe j f , 3d) tterbe 2 3)u nnrft j J 3)u tterbeft etc. etc. I am, thou art praised etc. Imperfect. 3d) tx>urbe 3 j . fi 3d) wiirbe 2 j etc. etc. I was, thou wast praised etc. Imperative. SSerbe (bu) j be (thou) Sffierbe (er) ( * j. let him be 2Berbet (tyr) 9 be (you) SBerben (fte) ) let them be $e(obt praised COMPOUND TENSES. Infinitive Past. ©elobt ftorbetl 4 fein, to have been praised. 1 P. 87, obs. 7. 2 P. 85 , obs. 5. 3 P. 85, obs. 6. 4 P. 84, obs. 2. 115 Perfect, Indicative. Subjunctive. etc. etc. I have j thou hast been praised etc. Pluperfect. 3tft tt>ar / 1 u . ^ . 3rf) marc / , , _ . 25u toarft j 3 £u tt)ar(e)ii j a etc. etc. I had 5 thou hadst been praised etc. Future "Infinitive. etc. etc. I shall j thou wilt be praised etc. Future - Infinitive - P# s/. 3* ttetbei r ,,, . f . (3d) n>erbe urbeft(3 e(ol,tn,erben etc. I should , thou wouldst be praised etc. Conditional -Infinitive - P# sA 3d) tintrbe \ , , . r . The same form. tfc^ ; engltfdj is not derived from (Sngldnbcv, but from Sltigel (Angle, i. e. Saxon); beutfd) from Qeut, anciently a German. In forming these adjectives, the terminating e or ev of the proper noun is dropped and ifd) or fefy added; as, sportugtefe, povtugtejtfd); Ranter, fpemifefy. §§§ P. 75 . obs. 1. * Excrc. I. , obs. 6. 1 The Imperfects of the verbs benfeu , glauben, meinen VEHBS. 119 English. It would have been translated by this time, (jetton**) but no publisher could be found who *** would aSerfeger ^gefunben gotten pay so high a 2 premium. It will nevertheless be t?oct) f «£)onorar n. bennocfy published by subscription. — His poems ® f)erau6gegeben auf Subfcvtpttort ©ebicfyt n. have been much praised and he has been loaded fefyr e itberljauft with honours. He would not sell it for fear (Styrenbejeigung tterfaufen au3 gurcfct/. he might be cheated. The books shall be brought ■®- betrogen ^foCen ^vjebradjt to you. — They would have been brought > but alletu 1 was detained. The more ft arguments ftt I ^ ear ^jurftcfgeljaltnt ©nmb m. (think , believe, mean) and others used to express a pos- sibility or probability generally require to be followed by the subjunctive mood, even without using ^jbhatf as may be done in this instance. *>!< Now already. *** Exerc. VI. , obs. 6. 7 P. 36, obs. 6. 2 In German the Article must precede the words: as, alS, efren fo; both, betDe; so, fo and too (adv.) p. How, generally followed by au adjective and the indef. art. re- quires in German that article immediately after it; e. g. : How serious a thing, toeld) erne ernftljafte 0, >i< Exerc. XIII. , obs. 5 , note 2. 122 VERB£. been much injured. — The best advice that f ^befc^abigt. 9tati)f». can f be given ff to you, is to exchange fff ^ faun ® gegeben Dertaxtfc^en it for a new one. § — I shall not exchange it. — I am afraid none §§ can be found that ride so easy. ( furd)ten ) ® gefunbett fallen fattft Well shall we go there? I have just been informed nun (f)ingcl)en) ebenSSS ® unterridbtet that Mr. S. is 1 waiting for me in the coffee-room. ftftfee m. I shall not be detained long. Our business will ^aufgefyalten ©cfdjaftw. f Exerc. VI. , obs. 6. ff P. 87. , obs. 7. ftt Exerc. L, obs. 12. g P. 30, 11. 4. §§ P. 58, L. 5 and Exerc. XIII., obs. 3. §§§ Exerc. II. , obs. 7 first part. 1 The different tenses of the verb To be standing before the Part. Pres. of another verb are never expressed in German; the verb represented by the Part. Pres. only being conjugated; e. g. : I am waiting, thou wast Avaiting, he will be waiting, 3dj toarte bu ttavteteft er totrb toarten we have been waiting, you will have been waiting, tint fjctben getoartet ifyx tt>erbet getoartet fyobzn they had been waiting, jie fatten getoartct. Note. The emphasis which is sometimes conveyed by this construction of the English verb, is often rendered in German by an adversative expression, as: id) toaxtc eben auf i()it, I am waiting for him. VERBS 123 soon be despatched. — You may 2 be greatly de- balb ^abcjemacfyt ^fonnen fefyr tciu* ceived. 3 — I know he has been asked to dinner fctyen toeip ^gebetertgum at our Charge's 5 whose *§ carriage will *§ be bet ©entdftetrdger here **§ in a quarter of an hour. — Is he often in— ( SStertelfhinbe ) ^em* vited there? x\ grand party will be given gefaben bort gtangettb ©efettfdjaft o empfangen t§ there this afternoon. — You would have been in- vited if your card had f§§ been left there t§§§ $arte ^abgegeben in time. — I suppose it is not very difficult to be [cbirer 2 Not to be mistaken for the Potential. „M.a\" must be translated in German by fcnneu (can) or rutfen (to be al- lowed), according to the sense intended to be conveyed, e. g. \ Do not tell him so,,hem?er leicf>t received as formerly. They have been frequently ^empfangen tt>ie normals Ijduftg deceived, as to their respectability. taufdjen (n?a8) Stanb betrtfft. Exercise XVI. I beg your pardon Sir, what is this street bitten Sie urn SSerjei^ung wit (gtrape called? It is called the New -Market- Street. — * gencmnt ncu SRarft Does it lead to an hotel? — It leads to several fufyren mefyrerepl. hotels. What is the name of the hotel * you are ** tote ( iptfjt )~~ looking Jor? I have forgotten it. — I should be fucben ^fcergejfen e§ mid) glad to show you ■ the way if the name could freuen jetgen - SBegw. ^fonnte be discovered. — You are very kind. — Well Sir ^entbecft gutig is it perhaps the Golden Eagle? I do not think fctettetcfyt golbett Stblev so. *** The Roman Emperor. The white Swan. romifcf) deafer weife ©cfytoan * Scil. ichich Exerc. X. , obs. 3 and XIII. , obs. 3. ** Exerc. XV., obs. 1. *** P. 44, R. 11. 1 Exerc. VIII. , obs. 2. Observe that it is generally the dative of the person. VERBS. 125 The Holland Hotel. The Golden Lion. The English |)ollanbtfrf) $o\m. Sewe Hotel. It is none of those that have been named. I have named all the respectable inns of our city. ^geitctmit fcorpgltd) Stabt/. I have been directed this way by the landlord. — mir 2 jetgen - von SBirtl) However f you have forgotten the name. — You aber o sergeffett must be taken from house to house till 77 you have fufyren $u found your hotel. Here is my servant he shall take you home. — It will hardly be believed 3 that I nacf) |)aufe faum have spent two hours in looking 777 for my ^$ugebraci)t 2 This verb governing in the active form the dative of the person (Exerc. VIII., obs. 2.) must also have the same case in the Passive , instead of the nominative as is done in English. 7 Exerc. II. obs. 7 , first part. ff Exerc. VI., obs. 4. 3 The passive construction is frequently used in English instead of the active with yy one C£ for Nominative ; in such phrases the active form of the verb with man for Nomi- native must be used in German: man toirb e6 faumgfrmben, one will hardly believe it. fff Exerc. VI. , obs. 1, also Exerc. V., obs. 10. 126 VERBS. lodging. That § may 3 §§ easily be believed , since *> farm glauben ba few people are 3 , met with so late. And begegnet §* fpdt so few that speak French. — That 4 language fpredfyen is not much spoken here among the common *nel ^gefprodjen gcmctn people. — German§** is now§§* much g§* studied Self ^erlernt by your countrymen. 5 — I wish 6 I had 6 been Don SanbSleute mir * § Exerc. VIII. , obs. 3 „that„ bct3 (Dem.-conj. or abs. P. 48) being in the ace. case and opening the sentence. gg Exerc. XV. , obs. 2. g* Exerc. VI. , obs. 4. 4 Unless intended distinctly to point out the relative position of persons or things, the German Language pre- fers biefer etc. to jencr etc. g** Exerc. XIV. §§. §§* Exerc. II. , obs, 7 first part. 5 Countryman, Smtbgrnatut, pi. Sanbeleute. Nouns com- pound with Sftann make their pi. %mte (people) as : Siaufz mann, Bimmermann; Jlaufleute, Stmmerleute (tradesmen, car- penters), ©taat^mdnner (statesmen), Sdjulmdnner (school- men), Slmtmdnner (bailiffs), Grfjem&nner (husbands) are ex- ceptions. (£{jeleute f married people of both sexes. $Rarm& leute , a low expression for men, fellows. 6 Scil. „that ic ExerCc I., obs. 6 and note chat verbs ex- pressing, a wish, desire j admonition , exhortation , coun- selling y similitude , belief , hope, condition and the like VERBS. 127 taught 3 it. — I shall study it when I return to * gelefyrt «■ juvutf f cfyre nacfy England. Why not learn it here, where better ternen opportunities may be had 3 than in your own coun- @elegcnl;ett ^fannSS** eigett try. — My time is too limited. fyitf. ju^&efdjratift. III. IRREGULAR VERBS. Note. The following list of irregular verbs has been arranged alphabetic ally for the convenience of refe- rence. But much time may be saved in learning them, if the student endeavours to bring all of the same ir- regularities under one class and to commit them thus to memory. To facilitate which, the various classes have been marked by Roman figures corresponding to the alphabetical order of change of vowel in the Imper- fect ; each class is again subdivided according to the change of vowel in the Participle. — generally require the following verb in the subj. mood, with „baj3" sometimes expressed, but more frequently un- derstood. §§** Exerc. XV. , obs. 2. 128 VERBS. V ^i 53 CO *£ n ^ o ^2 r*- o - '3 C o o o o J o^ g 2 G •^ £5 <>> «j — c*±- o"J X» *»>»>£> t: & s=> sO s& o O &> o ^> c- ^> o o a* o a* •33 sQ s£» A «3 <35 ^ O >X> sQ C2: ^: <33 cr: 1 5* *S 1 Si C w *C« *» *£> *£> 05 o ^v ° ° £2 J-> 5-> rr. «d -d ^ <^> o *i =£3 o o o s» = tO tta *£» *£> *£} JQ >o ^a- s£> *& s*» ^> ^> s» — >0 >0 v - *> !*"♦ a. ^ 1 <2 ^ fl Sfc} 2>S- § ►?o o o ±J S «5 o o o o « ^ o o O o « e* A ^> >o *0 ,£> >0 tf) ^ vX> »» >o ^Jl> >o — ' >o ^> s +* § -w ^ o 2 ^ » 02 >J> s£> s» CJ -x> vQ j} ■o g a 3 © 6 ^ o « 05 02 ^ 3 "C t: *c > sS ,£■* g & 3) S- >■ fa = 02 o -5 a 5B .= ci o = ^J ■u o A « ,_ cs ^ a c O ^= g i) b & Ki O 5J ^ .a ^2 03 ^ u c- o .- JS o ^ — ^2 fa h2 © «\ rs «v #s •N JJ> S «\ ■> •N *N »v ■> »s »v rv »\ •N *\ ^ *S" > §- £± CO N fj j- s « "' J- SJ £S a* 5 •» Si tsa. S o ^> o» £3 ° S eS- xJ B <33 o o> ■&>«>«,> .m ®$>Z)%®®$ > SP £? S? ^ SP 3P S? S3 «* c* - |> > o £ 6 H m ° ° u £ 5 3 5 — -a 93 •a 5 o > B~^ l o"5 *- 129 - £ B £1 &4r j|£ a AAAAjojo^joja e "C tr '3 2 c J=> ~ — ~ c - ci: 2 -. r '. r. r — •V — — y /: r* i; .> • — — — - ^ £ ~ g = i= m t " ~ "S : ^ © £ a *n s •- S ** ° § ° 2 ■V "V •> rs «\ ~ ^slQQfiQQftjgftS O w > JT- " H g S E= ir. E- Sv £ < 130 ***" g- S § S * « g cs o » ^ 3 ° 3 o> o o o o 3. <-» — ' SP m USi- ^3 ft* S 5 .p =0 :Q sQ --O --3 tS-M±-it±.5i^-t52.Qi.l5i.fcc!. £ »e 3 c^l Lt=L \X±. ^L *£- hi 33 *£3- LS£- jjs. cd- tet epL iJL -o £ A ? » £. ^ o .5 -*-> 33 w ^ ca .5 r^ ^c=i LE^ ^2 * h^;=; ^ . **- ■ iX) ^ B O , , r+-> ^~r <-~=- ^ i^ «>> 33 -£? s23* 33 *=?■ tSD- a* g_ sO> » g ^ "g o o *S O fc= 3 3 ,3_ 4> g_ ^~ ;^ £* g " •™ — — — = 03 = r — M — c CJ. v ■a u t- e , v »\ > c o o o £ ! *S ZL ^ « g. St S S i2. £3- cH. s & s & s ^ s $ ^> j- ■ s s c c ^ s "S JS 2* S «4- «>.^>33^=-t^j^L^ Ha Ilia III a IV III II a ■« H^^. W-ChM^I— I^^N^ 131 g» CP - tt *<> as a. Q Si o *> CD CD CD O *3d § ^ « s 5 ^ cs cs CD CD ^> ^> CJ^ sS3- 5G €S 5 CD <&> o ~> o o O £-> Cb> «*> <^i o '-> <_> o <_» o o o e* CO CD CD CD CD CD CD -CD CD CD CD •CTj CD CD CD CD CD CD CD i 5^ £ i ^ j^ O o <-> <-» o •fa CD 5 8 o CD tO w w CD CD CD *CD «•> c, a* o § fe >g g 2 CD CD >=5> -S- O O 6> « CD =o =cs it: CJ Q O o CJ O CJ fc CD CD CD CD CD "cD CD CD ,£> sT3> ** «> ^^ ^> «W^ 3»-» *-* cH ^ C— 1 •2 'fl j_, CD S « -c; ^ .a ^_^ ^ J3 CD ^ S= ^ S" *o te* ! | CD ^ ^ f*^ ^ *». *r ** a< CD 2 ^ § CD i4=> ^3" °S o ^ 5 s O 2 CO .— J © © £ w> -S 1 g s .2 35 73 P S 3 c3 5^ o S3 O O r- ^Z« 05 "3 T3* ^5" -Si SI £ s s S ^ ^ O CD CS «^> w f* s> .5^ Sl ,£ £ o K « CD o CO ft- <-> ^* J-» cs cs CJ o <^> Ck> *S Crf C5 ® ® © § © © © ® ^ '^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ <&5 ^ H M M H H H H M M M *-< w ►^ ►H ^ M 133 s g « S "£ ss> ^ ^ H ss ~ o s-> -£> O O s-» O C2 CS = C *C» S-> =C/ =J3 -— >Zi — =C2 =C3 l O ^ j; ^; 1 II *ssf:r; ^5- -O ' 1 ^ <*» ci a - .^ ^ <■* o : S '£ :rS -^ *~- £* ^ ^5 <°_ o' ^ ^ *■* ** -^ x-» ^ (iji «S <2 « o o -— -i3 £r* £r* £^ ? *; ^ 'S? ^ i; 2U ^ ^ *j i; ^ S S 5R ,-r O 5 > s s 1 § O — °2 O 134 VERBS. ^^ £-> *-♦ S3 P* ^ *^i £j- *~ j ^^~ ^> 5^ '*-> 2-> $»^ j— * i^ s^ iw > „ i T^ >,u^ *S^^j§. fc -o ^ ^ fT J£ *> *i -p-^S^L ** r | 5 2 J S -- S3 -a - c •> »s ■N £ g jf g 8 | I g -8 ,8 | 8 g g g- 1 1 S-8 g | ^^rCr^ ** ^* iii Jsi- 2* rJ tt ^ ° ° <^ -^ -— 'S S <3 CS |§|§$is> ft^&'q ^. ^ as ss es at-^ a$ as &> w VERBS. 135 ° 2S zi % 5 *L S. 2 CC <=D OD <35 ^3 C^ 4> ^> o o o <5} EO CK <23 CT O S =e -^ .^ ^ =o ^§ ^ -5 ^ 25 r: w -.S 3 >6* ^ £s *£T >S >S~ ^ *ET "B ;€T ;€t 3L E •3 OS bC o o'^^'S^^^^^^^^^'S-. « X •It *■=■ E ^, O .S e EJ O 03 - — ._ 03 « © !h cS ft - e: 3 - O ft E W H ft « w £ cc CD ft = © © >w cr = © DC rt w ^ = 03 03 J c/: ~ - © ^ 03 n © £ - **> T3 i- 03 > 03 ft r^ -— © 0) 03 bf) •= *«a O = 03 ~ 05 ^ 03 /: S3 V ^ 03 03 s £ c r 3 = "35 ri rt -t^ '~ ■ta « © © © Z i- .o < < < < e e8 ^3 E K E ^> O G < -r * X a. 136 ^> . j-* o >-• o Ji S s rt ri n o w !l SI c « ! =f *2 o £ "§ S .2 £ j -« j g e § § S « ^ o o g «* -O g; ^ S 2 J. ^> o O ' m o ST o» ^* O <_» O ^" *> c_> Oh ^ CT3 cr. cn^^^^^^"^^^^^ ^ ^ o ^ ^ i a. **o 1 52 5* o o ^ ,o £ I 5 b ^ t£ ig $S " sg ^ ax 43 ,q .$> tu 4s =ct ^5 »o <£ o H ^ =o Hi B B *c "5 **^ "^ '^ ~£ £ 2 2 S «*> ^^ *£f ££S^i?£££5£££ g; g g § *3 u— »— u— I CD tf ?i ??^~? if i s Si Si :-* g g g ,5 ^c ggg>s t^_ l^_ t__ L ^ C^_ . U-_ C-_ l^_ l ___ U_ <__ "^ S jj S -p ?* «: JL hS <-- ^ « *"" # ^ (St. f+i ^> ^ o N "1 I ^ •to s£3> \) «> fSi- s^ ^* ° ft< g £- ,y o CO 0) « 03 -*-3 ^ su U § a .fegSsfeSiSisS*** S > i> 33 S ? ? 5 « c '3 co ^ 0) «SMO!fl<(«(e!Hai»3(! > VI VI VI V} •> o ^ ^ *\*\»\«\« , \.r\.»\*\*\*\"\*\ WS »N »\ »N »\ ql •\"N"\»\«N"N*\"\«\»\*\"\ 2 Si NH si si H Si j- S ^ _ si <-> «>> i> o o s s jj si^Srisi Si ti ^ o o si « 5 o ° jl> CS3 ?* i£D. LSTl CJj o S S> ss ^ t* 'X - sC * ° ** -*- « .S -o j- g ^> -~- -5 SSst^^^^^SBSS 2 2 fi a* j^ ^ ^ >S" *C S S" ^ o *^> © ® ® ^ ^) ® ^ ^ sS c2 fl8 c5 c5 £ 3 flS M 5 "° -o -d g -° 137 i2- tH- *H- 13- tit £: t2: t2: £: «B: t£: «2: *£*- *£*- *J2- -a I 9 2 a a 5 ■ s- 1 & = "S:! 1 • " «, -8 a .5 .5 2 « 2 a, a, Si ^ & a< 5 *"" *~* , CQ •* qj t5 ~~ . .5 3 M 30? *o 2- It "5- *st a S. S- .§ S S S 5 -S 5 '5 ~ -est ®®®®®®®®®©$<9®®©®®®®®® 10 < p 138 i> o o o o o o cd cr. r^ cr: CO en cr> o IS = § jz, jz, CO _, ^1 i> i> i^ | « ** >. tja. *8 ir -Si en lSL >^ ^ s\ -«- *-> i^ jr r" ° -f c= j=> .yO CTD — * ^ ;-~ o» **5 ~£* « jj a c£L e£i cj±. !++" ,& ** St S --. ^P ,p* V£= t: ^ ^ - — .,_» _ CD *■: — c£±. ♦- "«3 JO J> CD fcC S3 o C S3 ^ O a? . S3 - •? * § 2 > - £ g go ^ "Z CJ «H C£ K X5 c: ^ « & ~ £ UD. ^ £ ^ r^n ! s * i§ S S 3 s -g fr 5 •§ "5 2 I ?? CC *£ t; •£ -e ^ti > ° m - a « « ~ H a 5 -^ Su 5. fS^f If If s a s "S 1 2 "I a 139 5 » s> » *P -*-» W "5 S " ^ K. ! - ° t ^ c8 « o •N *\ «s p., ^ Ct O "<> S O ^mn^ C3 « -S > > * - -d cj: » » ' DO DC £ r CJD <■* O ^ Zi x ~ C£> "- ~ 92 » X - U X *£ ^ ~i ■a - T 3 tS ~ g a o ~ Z e — ~ o 53 K c & -» Ph s" < £ 7' < < r- ~ - .j c. - •a «3 r^ M „ " " " ■* "* ** "* "* •* 10. 140 VERBS. IV. COMPOUND VERBS. They are, either I. Inseperable y II. Seperable, III. Inseperable or Seperable, according to the sense intended to be conveyed. 1st. Class. (Ins.) Does not admit of the aug- ment (ge) l in the Part. Past. In other respects it is conjugated like the regular verb ; compounds of irreg. verbs follow their primitives. To this class belong all verbs, the Infinitives of which begin, a) with the unaccented syllable of be, entp, eitt, tX t ge, mtf , *>er, jer and the (unacc.) adver- bials Winter, Wll, ttuber (against). Note. I. The verbs to which these syllables are prefixed always have the accent. bj with the above unaccented and an accented syll. as, frectuf, bear', beetn', beun', fcercuV, wrnac^, senm", tferur'. Examples. Seftt'djen* 2 , to visit; befucfj'ie, befucfjt, visited ; (gmpfan'gen *, to receive; einpfmg', empfan'gen, re- ceived ; 1 Verbs derived from foreign languages and terminat- ing in treu and revert, as , ftubirett, regteren (to study, to reign) etc. do also not admit of the augment ge. 2 Compounded from fudjen , to seek, to look for. 3 From fan gen , to catch. VERBS. 141 (£ntfa'gen 4 , io renounce^ eitffag'te, entfagt ', renounced; Gfrftn'ten % to invent; ©efcrau'djen 6 , to make use of; SSerfdjWert'fcen 7 ; to squander : ^rtbrft'deii 8 , to crush; ^tnterge'fjetl 9 ,to deceive; 33ot(en'ben 10 ,toflnish quite: SStberjte^en 21 , to resist. Seauftragen 12 , to commission; Seur'funben* 13 , to certify; 33eetn'tracf)ttgen 14 , to encroach upon; 23e^ un'rufngett, to disturb, to trouble; SBerab'fdjteben J5 , to take leave; SBeintac^djftgen 1G , to neglect; 23er- un'tetmgen ", to pollute; SSerur't^eifeti 18 , to (pass) sentence. Note II. There are a few insuperable compound verbs that have the augment ge in the Participle past. They are easily known by having the accent on the first syl- lable and being compounded with substs. adjs. or ad- verbial particles , as cmt'trorten , cmttoortete, geanttoortet, to answer; fvol/Iocfen , to exult; friU)'uuifen , to break- fast; i)caxVt)abcn, to administer . to handle; lie&'fofen, to x From Sagen , to sny. 5 „ gtnben , to find. e „ 53raudjen, to use. 7 „ Sdjnrinbeit , to dwindle. 8 „ £>rucfen , to press. 9 „ «§ inter, behind, 9 el) en , to go. iu „ SBoIl, full ^ enben, to end. 11 r, 5Biber, against, fteijeit, stand. '- ,., Xragen, to carry. 13 „ Urfnnbe , record, document, 14 „ Contracted from Gfinirag, disparagement, and tfjun, to do. 15 „ 9lb[d)ieb , leave. 15 „ *ftatfyld§icj , negligent. " r, Otetn, clean, unrein, unclean. 4 ,s ,, Urtfjeil, judgment , urtljeilen , to judge. 142 VERBS. caress; vatf/fcfykgen, to deliberate; tedtt'fertigeu, to justify ; iir'tJjeilen , to judge; toeiffagen, frafyr'fagen, to prophecy; ttuU'fafn'en , to comply etc. 2d. Class (sep.). Admits of the augment (ge) in the Part. Past. To this class belong all verbs, the infinitives of which begin with the accented syllables of ab, an, auf, aus, bet, bar, etn (in), fe£I, feft, fort, |)cr, Inn, f>o$, fog, mtt, nad), meter, ob, ttor, ft>eg, wiefcer (again), ftoW, ju and the compounds of some of the above syllables as ; fjerauf 19 , peretn', ^eraue', fmtab', tunein', iifcer* ein 7 , wxi)tx f baju, jufammen etc. Note III. These verbs are called sep er able, firstly because the augment (cje) is placed between the above syllables and the part. Vast, as is also done ivith 311 -° in the Inf. as, abretfen, afcgeretet, al^umfen (to depart); se- condly because in the inflected parts of the verb the compounding particle stands after the objective case or at the end of the sentence, except in relative and conjunctive sentences , when it stands and is written as one word with the verb. Examples. 3$ reife ah , I set off. Der 9ttann, ft>eltf)er 2L abretfet, the man who leaves. 11 The second syll. of these compounds carries the ac- cent with it. 20 3u in German, aud to in English are almost used in the same manner in both languages : only that in English the prep, to is always stated with the simple Inf., and in Germ, only when that mood is used in actual construction. 21 Relat. sent. VERBS. 143 2Benn 22 tcf) abretfe, when I leave. ®te untnftfjen, bct£ 22 tcft abretfe, you wish that etc. SDfttnefjmen , to take (with). •Jteljmen ©te t&n ntd;t nut? do you not take him with you. 3d) habc ifyn mttgenomuten , I have etc. dx bat x>ox 23 , ilnx nut^unetnnen, he intends etc. ©er greunb, ttelcfjer 21 t&n mttnimntt* Ofwojrt 22 fetn £ef>rer i£n mitnimmt, bin tcf) boc^ m'd)t ruing , though his tutor takes him I am not easy. 3^ nctfnn ifw mtt h\$ 33erftiu ©em SSater noiinfd^t , ba£ td) itm mttnejjme* ©0 suet er auc^ 22 mitttafym, however much etc. ©eljen ©ie, tt>ie 22 fefjr er if)m jurebet, see how very much he persuades him. 3$ babe ilnx nutgenommen , Jjatte il)\x mttgenomtnen, to exit tfm mttnefmten, er ttergafj tfm mttjunefnnen (he forgot etc.). 3d. Class (Ins. or Sep.). To this class belong verbs the infinitives of which are compounded with burcf) , through; liber, over; um, round j down; unter, under. a) They follow the rules of Class 1 when the above compounding prepositions are unac- cented , in which case they generally are transitive, bj If accented , they follow the rules of Class 2 y and are for the most part intransitive. 22 Conj. sent. 23 SSor^aBen, sep. coinp. to infeud. 144 Note IV. The stress , or accent lies on that part of the verb , intended to convey the principal meaning ; and this principle is not altogether foreign to the genius of the English language , as mag be seen from the fol- lowing examples. Examples. &urcfyfcfynet'ben to intersect £)urd)'fdjneii>cn to cut through £uvcWau'fen „ pervade 2>uvtf/laufen „ interleave 2 1 JDurd/fcfyiepen „ penetrate z '° £)VLvtf)'\&)a\izn „ transgress U'bertveten „ convict U'berfufyren ,, exaggerate U'bevtreibcn S>urd)fcfyie']$en JDurcfyfdjau'ett Ubertve'tcn itberfitf/ven Ubertrei'ben Uberfe'geu Umcje'^en Umfaft'ren Umfpcm'nen timgur'ten „ translate „ evade „ circumna- vigate 2/ ., encircle * s U'berfegen Urn' g el; en Um'fa^rcn Um'fpcmnen Um'cjitrten „ run through „ shoot through „ look through „ go over 16 „ lead over „ drive over „ set over 3 > go about „ drive down 2S „ change horses 30 „ gird round „ provide with a belt UnterfjaCten „ entertain Un'tedjalteu UntetfM'len „ support Un'tetjieUen Unterfte'ljen „ presume Unterfteljctt Note V. As an additional facility for the use of this class of verbs, it may be observed that whenever the mean- „ hold under „ put under j j stand under 21 As a book; with blank paper. - b To see through; as a design. ae As to another party. '-' Also to drive round. 2g To knock down by driving against. ;> Also to span. 30 (gtyannen, to strain, to put to; ®efpauu, a set of horses for drawing a carriage. VERB'S, 145 ing of these verbs is literal, they are severable; and in most cases inse per able , when figurative. EXERCISES ON IRREGULAR AND COMPOUND VERBS. Exercise XVII. NB. Trreg. verbs are marked thus & I thought * this was the first time *'* you had come to this country. — What did your friend fommeti^tn think of. — I should think it was * best to fcenfen^ cm (imp. suhj.J am fcejlen write to him. — Think another time of it. f — Does an the fire burn in the next room. — It did burn bremten^- 2 3 1 when ft I was there fff ten minutes ago. Pray burn 1 these papers. — I have burnt them. — tterbremten ^ Do you § burn coal or wood in this fcremten^ eteinfoMe/?/. country. I have never burnt any thing else but tttt>a$ cmbeted a\$ * Exerc. XIV. , obs. i. ** Scil. that. f P. 43, R. 10. YY Exerc. VI. , obs. 4. 7YY Exerc, V. obs. 4. 1 To burii; when implying to be consumed by flames; is rendered in Germ, by vevbreuncii. $ P. 40 rftttan." 146 VKKBS. wood. — He has burnt his *** fingers. — What §§ ruins are these. 2 The ruins of the Exchange, Sfotute/: Sorfe/: which was burnt down last year. A great many meberkennett houses were burnt down by that conflagration. — %tutx$bx\m$f. My cousin's house was also on fire, but it was bretmen saved by the resolute conduct of some firemen. — xcttm feft mufy m. Sofc^reute They have burnt the horse's legs with red hot gtuljenb irons. — How long §§§ have you known him. ©fen n. (ennett & fcf)on I have §§§ not known him long. Should you know erfemten^ him again. — I knew him directly. — Desire 7* foglettf) (@agen @te) the servant to grind the coffee. The coffee fte fott marten & is ft* ground. When did she grind it. She ground *** V. P. 45 , R. 1. §§ Int err. Prons. pi. „\va$ fur.' 1 2 After „xoa$ fi'tr" fra£ is used in reference of a nonupl. V. also Exerc. III. y obs. 2. $^§ Exerc. VII. , obs. 4. f* Exerc. VIII., obs. 2. -J--;-* V. neut. verbs, R. V, The passive auit 9 em a 1) ten , would be iu English ? ,is being ground". VERBS 147 it last night. — The rye, wheat and barley gcfiern 9(bent m. dio^cnm. SSeijen m. ©evfte/1 have been ground. Where were they ground, — They will be ground at the next millers. — Whom feet Wttttt did you name just now. I called him by his name, ttemten^ efcen nemien bet Call me thou. — Whither did he run so fast. — \vof)in taufcn ^ fcfmetf He ran after the coach. — The man has run very tft fast. — Who has salted the broth. — It is too much salted. — Another time do not salt it so much. — etn anfcereS I wish 777- I stood in your place. You have stood jlefjen^ there. — The dinner has§§§ been standing on table this §* half hour. — The horse has stood on its hind legs. — Who has done this. — I have not £mttev6etn n. tfnm - done it. — If I had §"* the strength I would do it traft also. Exercise XVIII. He begged his pardon. — I have invited bitten * (tfut urn) 33er$etlhmg bitten §* V. P. 49, R. 3. §** Exerc, VI. } ofrs. 4 and 8. 148 VERBS. him to dinner. He has begged a favour. They ju Xi)d) (umetit) Ounft have often begged for it.* — You shall not beg um in vain for it. — He possessed many estates in umfonft • 6e|t|en^ ®ntn. this country. — He did not possess them long. — Who gave ** him these estates. — The king has gefeen<* given them to him, — I gave ** him a short reply. — fur j %ntmxtf. What would he not give to know this secret. — Do you know if he is recovered from his illness. ofe genefen^ Srcmfpett He had scarcely taken the medicine when he re- faum nefnnen^- 2(r$net covered. He mended (recovered) apace. — When jufeljenbS did this occur. — It happened yesterday. This is gefdjejjett^ gefc^epett done l (occurs) to please him. — It is done ] g efcf) eb eii<> gefci ((en ® (^dat.J for his sake y. — What ft books does he read. — fefeti * * V. P. 43, R. 10. ** Exerc. YIII. , obs. 2. 1 Present tense y Ind. t V. P. 38, obs. 1 , P. 68 and 69. YY Iiiterr. Prons. pi. „iva* fur." VERBS. 149 now. — He reads the German authors. He has read most of their poets. — Have you read his letters. X)id)tev He was ttt lyiog- in his bed. — The ring had lain fiegett-o in the mud. — The books were ttt lying on the Rotb m. table. - — Do you buy this cloth. — You see he is faufet! measuring jtt **• — He has not measured it. — I mejfett do not see it. — I have seen a beautiful painting fefietr^ ©emdftew. representing 2 the coronation of queen Victoria. tarftetten Srotmng Somgiti Have you seen it. — I saw it also. Exercise XIX. They sat round the table. — I wish I had sat ftfien^ urn with them. — I wish I sat with my friends. — If bet Ytt Exerc. XV. , obs. 1. 3 The verb in „\ng" (Part. Pres.) in a relative seuteuce^ must be rendered in German by the Pres. or Imp. according to the sense required, with, the rel. pron. for nom. e, g. ireld)ce> He jlrcntmg :c. tarftcilte. Sometimes also with a couj. and uom. of the pers. pron. e. g. I saw him gettiug iu his carriage, iffy fa'i) it-it, als cv in (eiueu SBagcn fiteg. 150 VERBS. the emperor himself was sitting * in council, ** he diafy m. could not alter it. — He pressed me to write *** cmbern bringen^m him often. — He has also pressed me to come down to the j country to him. — Did he recommend his cutf Scmb n. empfe&ten ® brother to you. — He has not recommended him to an me but to my cousin. — If thou seest him** re- setter feljen^ commend him above all to be cautious. — He con- jct wxfid)tiQ X>tT* ceals his meaning in mysterious words. — Who fcergen ^ SDta'mmg gepemtmjjwtf 2Sort ff pledges himself to me for the truth of his assertion. bergen^ 2tit0fage/ ? . He has concealed himself in his closet. — We have Cabinet n. induced him to make this acknowledgement. — betoegen ^ ©ngejlanbmjj Men are frequently induced to do from interest, jjauftg au$ what they would fff not do from generosity. (£belmutf) m. * Exerc. VI. ^ obs. 4 and 8; also Exerc. XV. , obs. 1. ** Scil. fo. **% Exerc. VIII., obs. 2 aud note that the objective or accus. case „a letter" is here understood. f P. 75 , obs. 1. ft P. 24. y j j Exerc. VI. , obs. 6. VERBS. 151 The fire has completely bent it. He turned round *>6(ftg fctegen^ fuegen the corner and vanished. — Who has turned clown serfdnxunten ^ meberfuegen the leaf in this book. ®lattn. Exercise XX. I shall be glad to see you oftener. e3 mid)freuentt)enn befudjen mid) I think I have (come to see) you often since my befud;ett x arrival here. — I wish you would come to see me afolmtft oftener. — I am authorized by your brother to kauftragen^ &on provide you with the necessary sums for your verfefjen^ erfprberlid) ©umme journey. — I think I am provided with sufficient cash. — Did you ever feel the Innfctngfid; ©eft w. ewpftnben^ pleasure of seeing* your friends again 2 after many years' absence. — I have never had an op- ?Iht>efenfmt portunity to feel that. — Can you make up your entfdjltefen^ftd) 1 Part. Past. * Exerc. VI. , obs. 1. 2 To see fdjett , again toteber. This will serve as an example for all compound verbs that occur hereafter. 152 VKHHS inind to leave your country. — I have frequently t>evfaf[cn * akterlanb made up my mind for it. ** He makes up his mind mid) ju very quick. — It is not so easy to make up one's fcfmelf uifyt fu$ mind. — When one has made up one's mind, one should not tarry to execute a laudable design. — jflgern auSfityren tgblity fSovfyabtn You may save yourself *** the trouble you will erfrctren WMfyzf. not find him at home. — I am glad you are able ft'nben^ to save yourself that trouble. — Indeed I will save myself f that trouble. Exercise XXI. How do you like * this place. I do not like* gef alien ^ it quite so well as I did the last time ** I was here. At that time I *** liked it very much. — I own I ** P. 43, R. 10. *** P. 39, obs. 2. f P. 38, dat. first pers. * Exerc. IX., obs. 2 to like fdjmccfen , gefallen. ** Scil. when , bet. *** Exerc. VIII. , obs. 3. VERBS. 153 1 cannot conceive the reason. — I regret f you begmfen^ fcefcctuern have to own that , pray when did he own it. He has never owned it. — We have more than once regretted it. — Do not misconstrue my meaning. mtpbeuten 2 I should like 3 to know when I have misconstrued mccjen^- it. — If 77 it is not 777 unpleasant to you 777 we mif fatten e will read a page or two in this book. His manner (e[en ^ of expressing himself displeased me very much. — mifjfaften I can assure you., it has always displeased me. — 1 Always two seperate words in Germ. 7 Scil. „that." 2 «ome grammarians have made a distinction between verbs compounded with rmfi by allowing some to take the augment ge either before or after the prefix and others not. But since the most classical authors avoid usiug this class of compound verbs with the augment, and its number being too trifling, the example of others in coujugatiug them according to the general rule, has been followed here. 3 „Shouldlike" is the Imp. of the Potent, mood, instead of,, liked" j there not being a proper form of Conj. or Subj. in Engl. , it is circumscribed by the Imp. of „shall a , but must be rendered in Germ, by the Imp. Subj. 77 Exerc. VI. , obs. 4. 777 Exerc. IX., obs. 3 and XXII., obs. 1. 11 154 VERBS. 4 To disregard a friend's advice, is to be guilty § mi£acf)ien wave" fcf;ufttcj of ingratitude. — I assure you I never §§ slighted Unbanfhirfett mipac^ten a friend's advice. I should have slighted it, if §§§ I did not know that f* his motive was §§§ 33ett>eggnmb m. pure and sincere. — I am afraid thou abusest rein aufridjtig befitrd)ten ratfjfcaucfjen his kindness. — Are vou not glad 5 that his plot has miscarried. I should like 3 to know Slnfc^Iag m. tft nujjKttgen^- why it miscarried. Whoever f 7* promises much ; $erfpred)en^ will have 6 much to perform f f * He never §§ pro- mised much . but always §§ performed more than 4 Sentences like the present y give most expression in both languages when inverted ; in Germ, the gen. or the ace. case j according to emphasis or euphony, must open the sentence. § Exerc. VII. ,; obs. 3. §§§ Exerc. VI. , obs. 8. 7* Exerc. VI. , obs. 4. 77* The verb after .,much." V. Exerc. VI. , obs. 6. 5 Properly „fraten @ie jtdj nidji" etc. 6 Of two infinitives ^ the auxiliary stands last. VERBS. 155 he promised. — Count B. has promised to accom- ®vaf btQlti* pany him to England f§ next summer f§. fen Exercise XXII. The child has completely * torn ** the book. — gang jerretjjen^ The naughty hoy tore it from his *** hands. uttartig retpen e ifym *** a\\$ C sin 9-J Do not l tear this paper. The horse has stamped jerretpen ftcmtpfen on the ground. — This horse kicks every Sofceiim. jerjiarapfen thing to pieces. — Has he indeed f kicked it f to pieces. What does he cut there. He cuts fcfmctten jevftfmeiten Y§ Exerc. V. , obs. 4. - Exerc. X. , obs. 5. ** Exerc. II. , obs. 4. *** Poss. Proas. P. 45 , K. 1 and 2. ' „Not" always stand? last CExerc. XliL, obs. 5): but if by some moving cause the verb goes to the end of the sentence pnicfyt" stands before it : if a compound tense — before the first part. It is the same with some other adverbs. Note. Sometimes the object, direct or indirect, and pre- positions wilh their cases are inserted between ntcfyt and the verb. 7 Exerc. IX. , obs. 3. li . 156 VERBS. it in shreds. — The dog is feeding ff. ftust fletn ©tiicfdjen freffen^ 3io\tm. consumes faster than labour wears. — The horse jerfreffen fitted Slrbett ctfcnugen nibbles at the corn. — That mare is gnawing the nctgen cmfff ©tute jernagen manger to pieces. What is that, that has tumbled Grippe tft fatten ^ down the stairs. — The ship has quite tumbled to {rowttter Zxfypcf. tft jerfcttfen pieces. I have just heard what has happened to him. ttuberfaljren^ The new palace will not be completed before next $otfeni>en spring. — Our friend's temper is soured by the grunting Scume/: § serberben * many impleasant news that are continually re- yiafyxifytf. beftctnbtg $in* ported to him f . — The sentence must be exe- terbringen » Urtpetf n. x>oU- cuted. — Your orders shall be executed. — I am ftrecf en wtf jie£en & anxious to know how §§ his most recent work has begterig fine neu been spoken of (judged) in the last review. — The beurtfmten 3^tfc^rift ft Exerc. XV. , obs. 1. tft P. 75, obs. 1. § Literally , to spoil. §§ Exerc. VI. , obs. 4. VERBS. 157 equinoctial gales have very much disturbed us. Sturm beunruljtgen As we have settled it ? so it shall be done. — His 2 tterabreten gefc^e&en fcafjer spending - so much money causes much grief fcur^bringen aerurfadjen to §§§ his too indulgent parents. $u nadjftdjtig (Ston Exercise XXIII. My good Sir do not exult so much, your triumph Keb frolic cf en fe#r is not complete. — What do you conclude from l 9 wttfommen f^ttefeit^ cute 2 The possessive proa, as well as the poss. case frequently stand in Engl, before a Part. Pres. instead of a pers. pron. as noni. to a tense of the Ind. or Subj. mood with „that" before it; e. g. A««?e you heard of his going abroad , i. e. „that he goes abroad. Ci One's being sorry > i. e. „that one is sorry. " Phrases of this kind are rendered vari- ously in German; but the safest rule to translate them — until the learner has acquired judgement by reading — is by using the pers. pron. with £a|3 before it as nom. to the corresponding tense , e. g. ras tx ]~$ iriel ©clt> burdjBrmgt etc. §§§ Exerc. X., obs. 2. 1 The preposition which stands before a pronoun ex- pressed or understood, or before a verbal noun: cannot be transposed in Germ, as is done in Engl. , e. g. Whom do you take him for? (for whom etc.) gut loot fyalten ^ie itjn? The friend you spoke of (of whom etc.). 158 VERBS. that I have exulted. — In this country justice is administered with great impartiality. — Nothing is Ijantyaben * ltupart[)et(tc{)fett so interesting as to see infants playfully caress f(etne$£tnb fptelenb Itebfofen their parent. "" — The mother forgets poverty and Safer or Gutter soergeffen all other miseries of human life when her babe 3)citfcfe(ti]fctt menfctjfid; ©augftttg caresses her. It was touching to see how she ca- vnl)xm ressed it. — Has it caressed her. — This event was prophecied many years ago.*** — He is ge- pro^qeten alU nerally accused of an imprudent and even improper gemein anftctgin unffug fogar unrest behaviour y but in my opinion he stands per- £anb(tmgett>eife f. 9fte(mmg fiefren & fectly justified. — Has your father left town. — vecf>tferttgen tfi afcreifeti The coach by which he goes has not yet left. mft ift afcfafjren^ When he is ready to start I will let you know bmit akeifen SDer greunb son Dem ©ie ftu-acfyert. Heading of a 11 kinds he has a natural dislike to. ®e$ett bag £efen jebev vlvt fyat ex tint natitrXt^e Slbncigung. ;c V. Comp. Verbs class I. , note IT. ** This subst. is not used in the singular number iu German ; but parents — Cittern. *** Exere. X. obs. 5. VERBS. 159 (it 2 ). — Cut me a piece of that bread. — Iff I cut you a piece of it> you must eat it. — Whoever ft breaks off any flowers in this garden abbred;ett ©fume/. will be fined. — I do not break off anyfff mufj etne Strafe jafrtett flowers. — They broke off some of the branches of the tree. — I accept of it if you can conve- cume&men niently spare it. — Only § behold with what ft Uifyt entbe^ren fe^en^ ceremony he accepts my invitation to dinner. — ttmftariotpl. t Though he accepts it I fear he will not be able fitrd)teit fonnen to come. You have forgotten to order your man to tfergeffen *> auftragen Qfrtt.) take the books away. I have ordered (it to) tt>egneljmen ° him this morning. — Though he does not go out auSgefjen in this bad weather ; §§ I will (go out). - When the objective case is a personal prou., it pre- cedes the dative. f V. P. 142, Note III. and 143. „ obs. 22. yf V. P. 142, Note III. and obs. 21 and P. 53.,ReLAbs. ttt V. P. 58, 1. 5. § Exerc. II. , obs. 7. §§ Scil. fo. 160 VERBS Exercise XXIV. My time is divided in such a manner that I can- etnt^etfen jo not possibly undertake the work, * you offer me. unievnelmten ® SIrbett anbteten ^ You had better divide it differently. — Though I tpattrx cmbcro obgletd) divide it according to your desire , -*yet I must 2Bunfc|)m. bocfy*** decline your offer. — In spite of all his exertions Stnetbteien tro$ 35entufmng his plans have miscarried. — First *** let us fix fmb fe^(fd)(agen^ juerft feftftetten the rules and then work the exercises, — The augarfeetten Uebung rules on the compound verbs are fixed. You iiber jufcmtmenfegen 3^ttt)ort had better (to) refer frequently to them. — $u 9?ct$ jte^en ^ I have more than once referred to them. — I now leave you. — Come along. — Can you come fortgelpeti^ mttgeben^ along. — Though I cannot come now, I will mitgeljen by ad by. He goes with you. — They went with gefjen nut * Exerc. X. , obs. 3 and VI. , obs. 6. ** Scil. fo Exerc. V. , obs. 5. *** Exerc, If. , obs. 7. VERBS. 161 me to the fair. — Have you time to go with me. cutf SWejfe/: Though I go with you, f my brother cannot go with us. — He who will come with me, must let me know it very soon. — I will play this piece sorfpielen 9D?u* of music to you, and then see if you can play ftfftiicfrc. oh nac^fpiefen 2 it in the same style. First I will play it, and you fptelen shall play after your sister. — Though I played after her, I do not think I played it so well as she did. — And yet 1 endeavoured to play after you bemtytt mid) (in your style). — Will you dance this quadrille. rrtittanjen I dance this quadrille only to oblige you. Though mtttanjen his cousin dances this quadrille, she will not dance Safe tan$en with him. If you go to the post office , take mitnefnnen^ these letters with you. Though I take them with me, they cannot be immediately put in the letter- tegen box. — You ask if he will take them. — To be taften f Scil. fo Excrc. V., obs. 5. 2 To play after — to play in the same style or per- fection. i 62 VERBS. sure he will take them ; not to keep them , getmjj bef;a(ten^ but to take them with him. ff What are you thinking ff of. — Though he frequently ponders mui;fcenfen & liter nctd;beiif en over that subject, yet he comes to no conclusion. I liave often thought of it. — He has an ample narf;benfen fiber $\it competency. — He cannot live on his pay. — ?(ugfommen ctuSfommen mit SSefoIfeung Can you make this stuff do. — You must auSfommen mit 3^8 make it do. — Have you seen him come from fcctmit fommen mis the house. — Have patience I will follow you. — nacfyfolgen They followed one after another, fo'fgen . nad) Exercise XXV. He still continues in his old unpleasant habits. — fortfctfiren ^ mtangeneljm ©ewofmfmt He continued to maintain that opinion, when I left the company. — Whoever continues so obstinately Ijartnadig to persist in an erroneous opinion as he does, must fcetjarreit 6et trrig necessarily create himself many enemies. «0$tt>enbtgertt>etfe frf>affen * ff Exerc. XX[II. , obs. I. VERBS. 163 Whatever you see remarkable on your journey allci was bciivcxkiwwatl) you must write down in your diary. — Make it meberfd^reifcen ** invariably a rule to write down the expenses of befianbtg Unfoften * your journey. — Though I always write them down, **I can(yet)not see the good of it. He bod) yinmxm. who writes down his expenses , knows what has become of his money. I have so long persuaded cuts jureben you to do it. that I will persuade you no longer. Qhtt.J nirt)t I should like to know whether he persuades my Ob QdatJ father to do it. — My servant has seen them come out of (he theatre. My brother and {;et\utsfommen au$ sister did not know they*** had gone in. — My feitt fnneingejjen master wishes to know if you will come up jnnauffommeii ~ to him. Tell him I cannot f come up to him ft • c Subs. pi. ** Neil. fo. *** Sell. „that." Exerc. XI., obs. 2. f Exerc. XXI. , obs. 1. ft Exerc. XXIf. , obs. L Note. 164 VERBS. now Iff j he shall come down to me. — Two men permrterfommen have fallen down into that dreadful abyss. — fmtabfatfen in furc^tbar Slfcgrunb m. The country people were trying to bring serfucf)en Jjeraufbrmgen * them up again by means f* of ropes. They have ©eilrc. fetn agreed to let one of f** them down. ufceretnfommen^ JnnaMctjfen — They agreed , that § having §§ reached the erretc^en ground , he should fire § a pistol. — Tie Sobenm. a&feuera ^tfiole/: jufammenbtnben^ these things up. Are they tied up. I forgot to tie them up. — I should l have told you that fcorfjer fag en -j-77 Exerc. II. , obs. 7. f* V. P. 68, 1. 9. f ** Exerc. VII. , obs. 8. § Exerc. VI. , obs. 4. §§ Exerc. VI., obs. 7. 1 What has been said of the Future (.shall or will) Exerc. IX., obs. 1, is equally applicable to the Conditional (should or would), which must be translated by ttixtbe when implying the conditional , but by the tenses of follcti when implying necessity or obligation. It must be farther observed that in English the above phrase may be used to express condition — obligation — or option : in each of these senses it must be rendered differently in German , as : VERBS. 165 beforehand. — You did. * — I now tell it you be- forehand. * Must be translated , I have told it you beforehand. Exerc. III. , obs. 1. CCoxd.) 3d) lintrre ce 3fmen Bother gefagt baoen. (fallen — obligation) 3d) baite ee 3bnen ootberfaa^en folleit. (the sense in which it stands here). (Svbj. — option*) 3d) petite es 3i)nen oorber gefagi Note. 1. According to the rule of construction of com- pound tenses, the present translation should properly be, 3d) [elite e$ S^tien iwtfjer (jefagi Mb en. !??/£ £/*£ established custom rejects this construction of the Inf. Past in connexion with the modal verbs turf en, ttnntn, I an en, mo gen, mnffen, follen, irollen; and substitutes the two Infinitives with a tense of the auxi- liary (jaben ; e. g. dx fyai es tl)un tiivfen , he was allowed to do it. (St Ijdtte e£ ttjun burfen, he might [could, would or should) have been allowed to do it; instead of Qv bitrfte or burftc ee getyan baben. (Jr b&te k c * r ^ un ^ nnen ' ^ 6 cwM /*en retdjen the newspaper across the breakfast table. — The ixber Arabs surprised the French in their encampment, Slrabcr uberfaften Cager In the darkness of the night they f fell upon them 2)imf etyett itberfaffen ^ like savage beasts. — For more than ten days ttuft Xfykxn. fta$renb they f dared not to cross the line of their out- tx>aa>zn ixberfcfjretten 33or* posts. — They were obliged to walk across the pofien notfngen fd;reiten slain in order ft t° g e ^ t0 a stronger posi- ©efcttten erretrf;en feft ©tet* tion. — Let the man take care that he do not lung [often ttt (cid;t geben) fall § over board. — His , is an all encompassing fatten^ 93ort> [em a(( umfajfen §§ mind. — These works enlarge upon almost every ®ii\tm. umfaffen *** Exerc. VI. , obs. 1. f Exerc. VIII. , obs. 3. 77 Exerc. V. , obs. 10. 777 Pres. Ind. with tcv Mann for Norn. § Exerc. XVI. , obs. 6. §§ Adjs. Decl. II. , R. 3. 168 VERBS. science. — They took hold round each other's §§§ SBtjfenf^aft umfaffen gegenfeittg body and wrestled for some time. The undertaking Qtihm. ring en ^ is above his means. — It has already much ex- itfrerfteigen^ Wtittcl vfotx* ceeded his means. — The boys are getting over fteigen fteigen the walls of the orchard. Dtftgarten Exercise XXVII. The sentinel called out to him that if he SfyiVoteafytf. jurufen^ ft$ * dared to approach another step, he would fire unterfte^en nd^erfommen no$ ©d)rirt/. geuer gefcen at him. It is very extraordinary that he should cwf unbegreifli^ wit ftc^fonnen** have dared ** to make use of such expressions. — ftcf) bebienen It rains very fast let us take shelter. — Where regnen ftarf unterfteljen does your friend stand, he stands under the gate. Zfycvn. He ran with such force against him that he was Jpefttgfeti upset. — Some oil of vitriol got to the cloth unwerfen %$itvicWl fommen «■ auf §§§ P. 45 , R. 1. * Exerc. XVI., obs. 6. ** Exerc. XXV. , obs. 1 , note 1. VERBS. 169 and it is all over full of holes. — He thought no- gcm$ bur$(o$ew body could * see through his plans, but he _is mis- bur$fd)auen tr* taken , I have seen through them. — The planet ten ft$ you speak of ***J can only be seen through a powerful telescope. — If he looks under the table fcfjarf gernrojjr n. fucfjen unter § he will find his book. — The whole affair has been strictly investigated , yet without being able to unterfucf)en§ discover the criminal. He must feel pierced entbeden 23erbrecf)er ft$ bur$f>ol)ren§ with remorse. — He looked at him as though he fcon ©ettuffenebtg anfefjen oh wished to pierce § him with his eyes. — Some of rotten the savages pierce holes through their noses. — SSSilbe fco^ren § Sod) n. burd) § bet Being l too fatigued he carried him across the brook. miibe tragen§ ixber § The attachment of the parents was transferred to £iefce ii&ertragen§ auf *** Exerc. XXIII., obs. 1. § Comp. verbs, Note V. 1 The verb in „ing" (Part. Pres.) in an accessory sen- tence must be rendered in German by the Pres. or Imp. as required, preceded by one of the conjunctions, ba as, ittbem, to&fyrenb whilst, n?etl because, etc. CAs he was too fatigued etc.) 12 170 VERBS. their children. — The attack of the enemy was committed to the second in command, the com- ufcertragen «> 23efe^f^^aber mander in chief being * wounded. — Consign the DtetbtfefyWfyatex tternmnben business to him and you will find that he will ex- ©ef^dftw. au$* ecute it to your satisfaction. fupren 3ufriebenpeit Exercise XXVIII. The gates of the city were already locked. — ©tabtt^or f$tief3en^ At a given signal they were** unlocked. Several cmf Szifytrin. ctuffcpefkn me^rere thousand sheep were shorn this morning. — It is f^eren <&■ still a prevailing custom among some nations to fjerrfc^en ©ttte fSoltn. shave their *# heads. All the troops, foot f^eren «■ £ctupt n. £ruppen pi guff wit n. and horse swam aross the river. — The proceed- ^eiterei liber aSerpattb^ ings began; he was perfectly silent during the lung ruing, opening speech ; but when called upon * for his Slnftagrebe/". auffcrbern gu * Exerc. VIII., obs. 3. ** P. 45, Rs. 1 and 2. 1 Must be translated as if it were „when he was called VERBS. 171 defence, he delivered a speech so full of natural SBertpetbtgung fatten Sftebe eloquence ? that when he concluded both the 35etebtfamf ett f<#tt>etgen ^ fottwfjl judge and the jury were convinced of ttuecmcf) ©efdweme/?/. ufcerjeugen his innocence. — At that time the law had pro- Unfcfmlb/. ©efegra. *>er* hibited many things ***y that are now allowed. He fcteten^ tueleg C sin 9-D ertau&en divided in the most generous manner the large tfmlen crof ebetmutjjtg fortune which his father left him, equal- SJermogcn Jnntertctffen^ tngtet* ly with his eldest brother. — It may be d)en ££etlen alt ttetben recollected f * that the latter married contrary to ft'dj eritmern gegen the desire of his father, the daughter of a 2Buttf$ m. merchant. The old gentleman never forgave him £err (dat.J this act of insubordination, and has in £mtbtung SBiberfegticpett bttyafb upon" which is always the case after a conjunction or relative pronoun, referring to a Nom. antecedent, the Norn, and auxiliary being then mostly understood in Engl. See also obs. 3. *** Exerc. XXXI. , obs. 3. f* Exerc. XVI., obs. 3. 12. 172 VERBS. consequence left all his f property to his younger Sana son. — An officer in the army ff , holding a lieu- begletten tenant's commission, who always signalized hini- ©tetfe unt> au^etcfmen selffff by his valour, was invalided in conse- Xatftxhit bienftunfd^tg %oU quence of§ illness. When he recovered, §§ the ge $rcmffmt genefen^ duke of York presented him with a captain's com- fceforbetn ju mission. — The operations on the wreck of the Slrbett madn. Royal George, were continued during last week. Stcyat ©eorge fortfe^en The value of the guns 2 and copper 2 already re- 2Bert£/w. Nanette f$on er* covered 3 exceeds one thousand pounds §§§. — It fceuten itkiftetgen •J* P. 65, obs. 4 equally applicable to Poss. Prons. ft S&elcfyer etc. Exerc. XVIIi., obs. 2. ftt P. 41, R. 7. § Exerc. VII., obs. 8. §§ Exerc. V v obs. 5. 2 Nouns of the same case but of different numbers. The art. and noun to be decl. accordingly. §§§ V. Numbers, R. 9. 3 Scil. which have been. The rel. pron. and auxiliary VERBS. 173 appears from official data that sixty three iron erge&ett jtd) cuts amttity ?Incjctbe and brass guns, out of the number that had sunk with her 7*, are not yet recovered. Exercise XXIX. Yesterday * the new American 1 packet -ship verb in a relative -passive accessory sentence are often omitted in EugL, but must be rendered in Germ. Note 1. Sometimes the phrase may be constructed as in Exerc. XVI. , obs. 3 as might also be done in this instance, e. g. which one has already recovered. Note 2. Sometimes also the Rel. Pron. is omitted in Germ, and a verbal adjective substituted for the passive verb; as, £te in ibxn ©efellfcfrctft jo cmcjetteljm &erfcradjten £age, the days so agreeably spent in their company (in- stead of Me £a$e , foeldje fo ancjenefjm in tfjter ©efelU fdjaft verhacfyt totttben). £3alt> entbecfte fern lebig flie$enbe$, in SBlitt ge&abete$ 9tofi bet fcf)rrerifdum Dtetteret HjteS ftfotigti gall, &oo>? to s£eed fleeing without a rider, and bathed in blood } discovered to the Swedish army the fall of their king. f* Exerc, Till., obs. 4. * Exerc. II., obs. 6. 1 Simerifa, amevifantfcfr. Adjectives formed from proper nouns follow with few exceptions the rule laid down in Exerc. XIII. §§. Iu this instance an it is inserted between the noun and the syll. iid) for the sake of Euphony. Adj. nouns of towns, cities etc. are mostly formed by the ad- dition of zx t as in R. 6, p. 31, sometimes also ifri) is ad- ded; but no fixed rule can be given in this respect. 174 VERBS. Westminster sailed* for New- York. — Her first abfegetn na$ appearance on the stage took place on tuesday 33ufme ftatt finben night in the character of Otello. — - On the first 9tofle id entrance she was evidently much agitated. — A dintvittm. bemegen premium of 36^000 fr. has been proposed by the 33eIo|mung ttorf^lagen French Government for the discovery of means Grnibecfung to prevent forgery of stamps. — Some samples of serlnnbern galfc^ung ©tempel $robe the wine of the present year have been received from the other side of the Rhine. — They are con- ceit* sidered to be better than those of last year. — ttn& fur " Yesterday the weather continued very warm for the season. — ** In the evening ** ^ thunderstorm 3a£reSjeti am ©emitter attended with vivid discharges of lightening and a begteiten x>cn Jjefitg SKgjlrafrt good deal of rain passed ** over the capital. This jiemli(^»iel" n)egjte^en^ S^eftbenj makes the third successive evening that fein ftf)on auf einanbevfolgenb ** Exerc. VIII,, obs. 3. © VERBS. 175 similar atmospheric phcenoniina have been wit- fitf) attnlii) otmofpjjarifty Srfd^etmmg gejeigt fa nessed. Yesterday one of the locomotive-engines ben Cofomotfoe ran off the rail. — It was dragging six carriages abtveifyen ©djtene/rf. sief)en^ at the time. None of the passengers were injured. — gut SRetfenbe befc^dttgen The company have suspended the service , until (jing.J etnftelien SDienji i». the necessary repairs have been made. — A Stusbefferung phosphorus- match- manufactory took fire c$emtf$ 3un^oIj/?/. gct&rif/. in Sranb gercu 2 1 the night before last and burnt with intense fytxi& tforgeftern Mttg fury. — The thieves had brought along with them 2Butf> mitbnngen a long ladder > which they deposited along the meberfegeit Icings walls of the building. ©ebdufce Exercise XXX. 2 3 1 An unfortunate event occurred a_few days since. 3ufatt jutragen^ ftentg wx His proposal obtained the most flattering applause. SJorf^fojj txfaitn® fd&meid&etyaf* Seifcitf The body of Cardinal Duke d'Isoard has been la- 176 VERBS. tely embalmed. — The coffin was wadded etn&alfctmtren ©arg mit 33aumtt>offe internally and covered with red satin. ctuSfiopfen ttwenttg itfcerjtefjen^ Sltlaf tw. Over this is a coffin of lead \ and over this a third SMrf ' of oak 1 , also covered with red satin. — The bru- tal ruffian would have strangled him but for menfcpcf) Dtduber erfcrojfeftt ofjne the timely intereference of a waggoner 3 who jeitftdj Dastmf^enfunft gulnmantt was passing (near) the house and heard the ttorfceifommen an poor man's cries. — The rascal escaped at the ©efd;m £d)urfe entfommen^ jur time, but has since been arrested. — It is known etnfangen^ befamtt to my readers that a memorial from merchants in- £efer SSorftettung terested * in the trade with China ? was recently presented to Lord Palmerstone, praying** that the nctd;fu$en l 23(et, bletetn, of lead; ®olb, golden; (Bitter, fitter n; jluipfer, fityfern, of copper; «§ol$, fyclgern, of wood; dicfye, eicfyen, of oak; 33ud?e, budjen, of beech; ^etbe, fetben, of silk; SBoUe, Pollen, of wool etc. etc. * Exerc. XXVIII., obs. 3, scil. „who are." ** Exerc. XVIIf., obs. 2. VERBS. I?? English Government would adopt measures for ergreifen $fa£regel protecting *** their interests in that country. — A (eftyfigen deputation to whom that memorial is entrusted deputation amzxtvcmm had an interview with Lord P. — Many of the Urtterretuttg queen's soldiers taken 2 by the Carlists^ gefangett tte^meti ^ were set at liberty by the interference of the French fegentn 23ernuttetimg Ambassador. — The king came to Paris yesterday and held a council of Ministers ^ which broke up aWtmfierratfj aufke&cn & at four o'clock. — At five his Majesty returned to urn Uffr/. jurucffcfcrett St. Cloud. — He wrote to his friends: I have prevailed upon Lord D. to allow me to remain here tewcgen for a month; they knew, that I defied wc^renb £ro£tueten<3 them all. — I have told youf before, that Iff (jiatJ) fdjon fri'^er *** Exerc. VI.j obs. 1. 2 Exerc. XXVIII., obs. 3 Note II.: must be rendered; SSiele ber, fcoti ten Garltften gefangen genommenen Sofijaten ber ^ontgin ic. , thus placing the less important before the more important words, and the dat. before the ace. V. also Exerc. X. obs. 2 and 5. 7 Exerc. IX. , obs. 3. tt Exerc. XVI. obs. 3. 178 VERBS. have been received with open arms. That demon- stration of affection must have given you great rung 3wteigung satisfaction. — I was fighting the battle of libe- Stampfm. Sibe* rality against prejudice. — Mr. F. on arriving j ft xatitat Boxnvthciln, aU anfommen at a fine lawn saw a gentleman and lady sit— cm ©rctsplctg ting§ on the edge of a reservoir. — The lady Sicmb Siffiafferkfjafter m. was quietly reading a book, the gentleman was ruing in throwing little pebbles into the water, — This be- i?tefel bet ing Iff his practice when he does not throw @eVDOpn|)ett juwerfen crumbs of bread to the fishes. §§ — The inaugu- Srotfrume feinted* ration of an equestrian statue of Maximilian I. Elec- fmng Sieiterfiatue ^ur* tor 3 of Bavaria took place at Munich on the 12th fuvft ftctft ftnben inst. in the presence of His Majesty the 3 king, b- 2»- §§§ ftf Exerc. XXVII., obs. 1. § Exerc. XIX. , obs. 2. §§ Exerc. X., obs. 2. §§§ i. e. biefes SJtonate. 3 Nouns in Apposition must correspond in case and number, e. g, WlaximilianS bes erjien, jturfitrften *hwi SJaiern, VERBS. 179 the minister of the interior M. Abel delivered an fatten ^ appropriate oration; at the conclusion of which the angemeffen dtcbtf. bet @$lu§ king said : we are now paying a debt which has entridjten Btyutbf. been due 7* from Bavaria for nearly two centu- f^ulben fettbetna^ Sau- ries. punbert V. REFLECTIVE AND RECIPROCAL VERBS.* I. In German almost every verb may be made re- flective or reciprocal^ producing thereby as well a change in the nature as in the meaning of the verb; as may be seen by the following examples ; Active. Reflective. anne^men, to accept, but fidj cmneljmett, to espouse, ad- vocate, etc. l bebtenen, „ serve, „ „ bebtenen, „ make use of. 2 -j-* Exerc. VII., obs. 4. * V. Pers. Prons. P. 41 , R. 7 and examps. J 3d) nefytne Sfyvett ^BorfcI^Iag an, I accept your proposal ; 3d) neljme mid) 3f)re3 33orfd)lag,3 an, I advocate your pro- posal. 2 £)u bebtenji £>emen §errn gut, thou servest thy master well. £)n bebienft SDJd) fd)ted)tev 2lusbritde, thou makes t use of bad expressions, 180 VERBS. Active. Reflective. bef(agen, to pity^, but fid) beflagen, to complain etc. of. 3 benelnnen, „ take away „ „ benetaen, w behave. * befdjttietett, yj load, add „ ,} befcr)n?eren, „ complain 9 a load, press lodge a com- down etc. plaint etc. 5 begte^en, „ occupy ^ im- port etc. but „ Be^te^en f „ refer to. 6 erimtetii, yy remind „ „ erinnern, „ recollect. 7 tyerausneljmen t „ take out „ „ Ijeraugnclj* men, „ presume. fctytagen, „ Deat «• „ fcfelagen, „ fight a duel. fcerrccfynen, w render an ac- count of, but „ ^erred)nen, jy miscalculate. tunfteUen, „ present, „ „ fcorjleUen, yy fancy, ima- introduce gine. toeiiben, n turn » M toenben, (an Semanb). yy apply to. 3 (£r beflagte femes JJreunbeS (sctytcffal, obme ficr) itber fern etgetie^ ju befiagen, lie pitied his friend's fate without com- plaining of his own. 4 ($$ benimmt berSadje rudjts an tavern ffiertt), it deterio- rates the matter in nothing. 33etbe ^arteten fyaben fid) gut benommen, both parties have behaved well. 5 3)tefe SBaare ift §u feljr nut Slbvjaben befcr)toert, the duty on these goods is too heavy. SSir miiffen ung beSfialb bet ber St-egterong befdjtoeren, complaints ought on that account to be made to the government. 6 3fyr fyabt eitre tteue SBofymutg be^ogen, you are occupy- ing your new appartments. 3§r fyabt eufy auf micfy be^ogen, you have referred to me. 7 ^ergeffen @ie nifyt, mitf) morgen baran $u erinnern, do not forget to remind me of it to morrow. @te erinnern fidt> f @ie fjaben es fcfyon etnmal gefagt, you recollect, you said so once before. 181 Active, Reflective. ttertoenben, tomakeuseof,but jttfjsetfrenben, to apply for. aerfugen , tterfammeln, dispose of, order assemble draw back , Neuter, betragett, benfen, $anfen, „ i?er|ugen, „ proceed to. (fright) „ serfammelit, „ meet. » ^uru betragett, to behave. „ think, „ scold, betifett, janfen, „ imagine. „quarrelwith altercate. Impersonal. eg bmtft ltitr j „ Mnty. jit appears to me. „ efelt micr), I loathe. Reflective. ftdj bunfett, j to fancy, im- „ bdudjten, I agine. „ efeltx (&or w feel disgus- etroaS) ted at. II. Some verbs are never used without the reflec- tive pronoun; they are distinguished in Dic- tionaries, by jtcfj or the word reflect, such are; jtdj cmmafjen, balgetx , bebattfen , beeileti , to arrogate, presume. „ romp, wrestle, wrangle. „ thank. ,, hasten. beetfern, bemuljett , bejfreben, befi'eipen , bejletjngen , begebett, ttad), begnugett,tntt b el) elf en , befihnmern , belaufen, bemddjtigen, endeavour. resort to , set off. be contented with. put up with. care for. amount to. seize , take possession of. 182 VERBS. fici ) bemeiftern, to master j subdue. tt befcfyeiben , 99 be advised. „ befinnen , „ consider, think of. N bucf en , „ stoop. tt befrerben, „ pay addresses to, apply for. tr embtlben , „ fancy, imagine, be conceited. tt einlaffen , „ embark, venture. tr entbloben , „ make bold. it entbrecfyen , ) „ abstain from, forbear. tt entfyalten , ( tt entfdfylagen , „ to get rid of. „ entfcfyliefjen , „ resolve. „ entfe^en , „ be shocked at, shudder. tt entjtnnen , „ recollect. it erbarmen , » pity* commiserate. tt eretgnen , „ happen. tt etgeben, „ surrender, acquiesce, yield. tt erf dlten , „ take a cold. tt erfunbigcn , „ inquire after. it ertterben, „ acquire. H fteuen , „ rejoice. it furd^ten f v be afraid of. tf gebetben, ' „ assume particular looks, ge- sticulate. ft gettauen , „ dare, venture, presume. tt grdmen , „ to grieve. tt Ijdrmen , „ fret, grieve. tt ndfyern , „ approach. tt tterbeugen , „ bow. tt *>er£flidjten , „ engage. tt t>erfd)tocren , „ conspire, plot. tt ttontetytnen , „ intend, resolve. tt tteigent , „ refuse. tt ftriberfe&en , „ oppose, resist tt ttmnbern , „ wonder at. VERBS. 183 Exercise XXXI. To how much do you think my travelling ex- cmf penses amounted. — You have mentioned it before^ ftc$6elaufen but I do not * recollect * it now. It is singular, of late fonberbar fett tU I 2 cannot** at all depend on my memory. ntger 3tit gar fity x>erlaffen auf @ebacf)tnt# I will tell you what sum. — Stay ; I dare say I warten tt)afjrf$eintt($ shall recollect it after I have considered a bit. It ft$ ertnnem ftdj befmrten tt>emg is not *** a large sum f considering the time ttenn man beritcEftc^ttgen you have been travelling. — Next month I 2 shall auf D^etfen jugebrac^t £aben set off for Rome, in order to settle a difference xiafy fcetfegen ©tretttgfeit that has arisen between two well known parties. fetti entfle^en fcefannt $erfon * Exerc. XXII. , obs. 1. 1 The refl. pron. stands immediately after the verb, un- less by some moving cause the latter goes tho the end of the sentence. 2 The order being indirect the inflected part of the verb stands before, and the refl. pron. after the Nom. ** Exerc. XXI., obs. 1. *** Exerc. I. , obs. 7. t Exerc. XVIII. , obs. 2. 184 How has 2 it happened that you did not ft know fo ft$ eretgnen 2 . 3 . l anything 3 of it before. I can easily imagine the fruper Uifyt ft$ *>orfMen 4 difficulty of your mission 5 , I hope you will not ©4)ttuertgf tit Stuftrag m. fern get into difficulties; if you should fff I beg you ftd) sustepen will address my friend B. and refer to ft<§ tt>ent>en an ft$ bejiepen auf 2 3 4 1 the letter § I wrote him about six weeks ago§§. ungefdfjr The worst §§§ with one of these friends is, that fcpmm he has always fancied f* he never could do ftd) einbtfben wrong. — He , ought , to make up his mind , to Unrest n. ftc^> entfd;liegen ff Exerc. XXII., obs 1. Note. 3 Thing is not translated, when used adverbially, or standing in connection with an adj. or adv. as, anything, tttoa$) not any thing, nidjtg; something, etwctS; all things, every thing, alle^ u\ 4 ftcfy is changed into mix, because this verb governs the dative, P. 41, R. 7. 5 Literally, @>enbuitg. 777 Exerc. III., obs. 1. § Exerc. X., obs. 3. §§ Exerc. XXIII. *** , also Exerc. X., obs. 5. §§S V. Gender of substs. N. Gend. R. 5 and P. 17 Note. -p' Exerc. XVI. , obs. 6 , Note etc. VERBS. 185 acknowledge his wrong. He would never yield emgeftefjen ftdf) ^er^e&en to such an idea ; for cringing is what he fcteSDemiitfngmtg hates above all things 3 , and he would never cringe to any man. mitifjtgen *>or Exercise XXXII. Please (to) go * to my chest of drawers and gefdtftgft* Commote take two silk pocket-handkerchiefs out. £erau3ttel)men ©etbe** £af$entud) n. He takes too much liberty in animad- ft$ Jjerau&tefjmett ta* verting *** upon my friend's conduct. He expresses betn ftd) his sentiments on this measure with much cor- ctusfprecfjen iiber Wagreget/. fytxfr diality. You pronounce these words with amazing licfyfett cntgfpvedjen erftcmnlicf) facility. They had beaten the enemies and were Setcfyttgfett fdKagett proceeding farther up the country ? when they ft$ kgeben tief in were stopped by fresh troops > unexpectedly is- auf^alten * Exerc. II. j obs. 10 and 6. ** Exerc. XXX., obs. t. *** Exerc. VI., obs. 1. 13 186 VERBS. suing f from the neighbouring forests. — Their henafyhavt quarrel rose so high, that nothing less would sa- ©treit be* tisfy them than to fight a duel. When do you friebigen ft$ fc^Iagen mean to render an account; of the moneys you gebenfen ( tterrecfynen ) " ®cli>n. received during my absence. I beg your pardon if 1 2 3 TT the sum is not quite correct, but I see I have mis- gctna rtc^tig ftcf> calculated. I may wellfff imagine fff your *>erre$nen fornten ft$ tforjMett Qdat.J surprize , when you discovered, the person § Ueberrafc^ung aU entbecfen ba# introduced § to you, to be §§ an old acquaintance. xwftetfen 33efamtter He disposes of nearly all his l property for chari- tterwenben gcmj 3Sermogen^. ju milb* table purposes. I will apply for you to the tf)dttg Smdm. ftd) »era>enben governors of the charitable institution that these §§§ aSorfte^er ttttfb ©tifttutfl bamtt f Exerc. XVIII. , obs. 2. jf Exerc. X. 5. fft Exerc. IX. 3. § Exerc. XXVIII., obs. 3, Note 2. §§ Exerc. XIV., obs. 4. 1 Exerc. XIV. , obs. 2 , equally applicable to the poss. pron. §§§ This part of the sentence may be rendered, either VERBS. 187 poor helpless orphans may be received §§§ into IrilffoS 223atfe/l aufnelnnen the asylum. — After a great number of years Slttftali tang 3?ei£e spent in the service of his country, he retired jufr ringen Siettft m. SSaterlanb ftd) %u* to his estates , to devote the remainder xu&iitytn auf ®utn. ttuimten 9?ejlw. of his days to the affections of his family and the cultivation of the sciences. It must be interesting ~£datj to know, how much the capitals amount to al- auf ftcPetaufen ready employed f* in the laying down of railroads. x>ern>enben cmlegen ©fenfcafm I will endeavour to get you the particulars of fid) bemitljen $erf$affen CdatJ kuStunfts. iifcer what 2 interests you so much. — Have the kind- ness to put up for a day or two with these rooms, in a couple of days a family will leave, when I shall be able to accommodate you with a fine suit of apartments. according to, Exerc. XV., obs. 2, Potential ; or Exerc. XVI. obs. 3. f* Exerc. XXVIII., obs. 3. 2 „What u is often a contraction for ,,that which;" and must be rendered in Germ, by ba^entcje ftelcf)e$, or its abbreviated bctS tt>a$; except it stand as a relative- absolute (v. Rel. abs. and obs. 12, P. 53, also examples P. 54). 13. 188 VERBS. Exercise XXXIII. We have assumed the authority of* deciding fi$ anmagcn ©matt enifcfjetben tn this matter, convinced that sooner or later they ©a^e/. friif) fpat would** have been obliged to have recourse to ft$genotfngtfel)en ft$ ttenben cm a court of justice, when their expenses would have ©ert<$tSf>of unb bcmn Unfofkn amounted to an enormous sum. Passion*** so ft$ betctufen auf ungeijeuer ber 3orn completely overpowered him^ that he was unable ttoftig ftcf? bemetftent Q en O to utter - a single word. They have resorted to a Ipemvbringen ft$ begeben m 1 3 watering place ; in order to restore their S3ab ttueberf?evjMen health which has much suffered. I shall not be sat- tetbeu ft$ be* isfied with this answer, but will make farther in- gnugen fewer (£r* quiries respecting the whole affair. — Be funbtgung rucfft$ttt$ Q en 5lngelegen^ettfajfen advised by me, and you will, I am convinced ftcf) befdjeiben son e^ubeqeugen quite alter your opinion. Professor P. * applied dnbern ftd) ttemenben * Exerc. VI. , obs. 1. ** Exerc. XXV. , obs. 1 and (Subj. option'). *** Exerc. V., obs. 2. 1 The article is frequently used before a proper noun VERBS. 189 for the chair of Philosophy at the Univer- Cef rffu^t Q en tyWtf^W an sity of H., vacated f by the death of 1 Dr. M. erfettgen C9 en They embarked into tou many speculations ^ and ft$ emfaffen in it was but natural that they should not be suc- bct£er e3 £datj glitf* cessful. Accordingly they embarked and arrived a fen bemgemdg ftcf) einfdjtffen few days after at Alexandria. It is impossible for ju SUexcmbrten me to describe to you, how much I have been (dat.~) fto) of person 5 but more especially so if preceded by an epithet. Note I. Proper names of countries of the fern. gend. have always the article; bte (Sdjtoeij, He Surfet etc. Also those that have an adj. placed before them; ba3 fretc Slmertfa , ba$ ftol$e (Spattien. Note II. The article is also placed before common nouns expressive of things unique in their kind; ber $tm* mel, bte <§cUe; ber 33li§, ber Conner 5 ba3 Men, ber £ob jc. Or when a common noun is used emphatically j ber Sftenfd) ift fterbltdj, man is mortal; bte Steltgion erfyebt bte 2ftenftf;ert itber fie felbft; bte Srreltgton erntebrtgt fie mite* bte £fytere. Religion raises men above themselves ; irreligion sinks them beneath brutes. 3)et 3Beitt totrb btefes Saljr fefyr gut toerben, wine will be very good this year. f Exerc. XXVIII. , obs. 3 . Note II. 190 VERBS. shocked by the account. — How often has it not entfe^en iifcer yi erbarmen itber his brother's helpless situation. A singular accident jttflfo$ Sage 3ufaK happened to the army. There were abun- ft$ eretgnen in §ttxn. fu^befmbenetne SWen* dance of bee-hives in the valley; great numbers ge SBtenenftocf m. fe£r *>iet eating ff of the honey were taken with violent ergreifen son f>efttg 2 1 vomiting attended with raving fits : so that @rfcre$en kglettett »cn SBSa^nftim Sfafattro. those who were least ill, seemed like drunken 2 Wentger franl fc^einen betrinf en men 3 and the rest furiously mad or dying 3 ; ixMQpl. rafenb totf C in fO ft Exerc. XVIII. , obs. 2. 2 P. 21, R. 2} but standing without article , the plural is formed according to decl. I. of adjs. 3 i. e. to be dying. Neuter verbs 3 indicating a certain VERBS. 191 however none of them died, and they recovered gene fen the 4 next day, about the same hour it had taken urn cttg ergreifen them. VI. IMPERSONAL VERBS. I. They are mostly the same as in English; as, eg regnet, it rains; eg fdmeit, it snows; eg $a* gelt, it hails; eg frtert , it freezes. II. Many transitive and intransitive verbs, are in peculiar phrases, frequently used impersonally; as, eg fti$t, it pricks; eg trdgt fid) ju, it hap- pens; eg frdnft mtd), I am vexed at it; eg fdngt ftd) mdjtg an, nothing- can be done; eg fd)ldft fid) , fdprt ftd) gut in biefem 28ctgen , one may sleep , ride comfortably in this carriage. III. Many impers. verbs are, or may be used with the objective case of the pers. pron., as, eg Intngert mid;, I feel hungry; eg buxftit mid), I am thirsty; eg xtxxtt mid) f I repent it; state of beings mostly omit in both languages the auxil- iary and are turned in Engl, into a Part. Pres. This form however is seldom used in Germ._, and the Inf. preferred* 4 Substantives expressive of a positive relation of time, are stated with the ace. case. 192 VKRBS. e3 friert mu$, I am chilly; ee freuet mt$, I am glad. Note I. Jn £Ae tatter ctass e6 is often omitted, and the second pronoun placed before the verb; as, mid) friert, micfy bitrjiet, rmcr/ ^ungert *c. IV. Both transitive and intransitive verbs are some- times made passively impersonal^ to show that there is or has been something carrying on among a certain number of persons ; as ? @g umrbe fo Diet gegeffen unb getrunfen, ge* fungen unb gelad;t, bag t$ foajjrent) ber erften SSocfje an mdjtS (Srnfittd^eS benfen fonnte, there was so much eating and drinking, so much singing and laughing, that for the first week I could think of nothing serious. Exercise XXXIV. There were continual gales while we were on ee kftdnbtg ftiirmen the Atlantic ; ' it thundered and lightened some- atlcmtifc^ 3J?eer ju* times for a 1 whole day together. — It is a pity ** wtiUn ben* in etnem fort fcfyabe 1 la English the indef., but in Germ, the def. article must be used before nouns stating a division of time, measure or weight ; e. g., 28ie »tel bqafyien 8ic ben SRonat fur 3(jr £ogt3, how much do you pay a month for your Iodgiug. @ie fojxcn brei ®ult>en bets ©titcf , ba3 «§iwbert, ba3 £ai^ ftnb ic. , they cost three florins a piece, a hundred, a thousand etc. * Exerc. XXXIII. , obs. 4. »t VERBS. 193 it did not hail also — why it did hail but I for- cmdj got to tell you. — I must feel indignant if you eg eg*** emporetr*** put so little faith in my words 7. It is fc^enfen ©lauben (Vfaf.) seldom found that so many perfections are fetten treffen*** SBottfommen^eit united in one person. The question is not as to sereimgen gragett*** whether sufficient capital can be raised for such oh Jnnlctngftd) pi. f erpeben an undertaking, but whether it is at all practicable. fonbern aad) aw\tyvi>av Things are easily proposed, but everything eg aUe$ ftd§> laffen hityt t>orf$lagen eg atfeg is not so readily executed. — I am vexed tafrenjtd) aug fuf^ren eg*** drgern that I had not sooner notice of it. — The stars $enntnt§ eg glitter 2 , the moon shines faintly the breeze is funfeln eg 9Kont>*n.fc$euten matt eg Cuft *** V. R. III. f V. Substs. with difft. plur. P, 24. 2 In the elevated, solemn, poetical and descriptive style,, the verb is frequently made impersonal, though followed by its nom. with which it agrees in number. It is the same in some optative and imperative sentences ; as, (Sg lebe bit jlctugui, long live the queen.— (*a ftevBe fcer ffies* rcttfjjer, let the traitor die. 194 VERBS. fanning , the leaves rustle softly in the foliage ; we£en eg raufdjen fanft Zauhn. what a delightful evening!— The trumpets and $errltc$ ©rommetett kettle-drums were hushed in silence — a sweet ^cwfen ( f4)rt)etcjen ) ffig melody of harps and flutes began , and instead ©eton Jg>arfe/. grote of a dreaded lion } a gentle lamb crouched f f f to grumrng fanft Sammrc. fftf)f$mtegen ju the feet of the trembling man. — He dreamt that £ datj eg trdumt he should be victorious, but that his life must pay ftegretcf) for the victory. They were presented to the king, wrjletfen but fear deprived 2 them of speech. There was gurc|)t§egtaubt (j&at~) @prad;e§ eg Herbert a great deal of talking, but little done. Why is the " fe£r mel " " fpredjen drum beating — there is a fire — the garrison eg trommeln ferennen 33efa£ung is called out. itnter tie SBaffen 77 Poetically — commonly £unn^ete. 777 Exerc. VIII. , obs. 3. § Exerc. XXXIII. 9 obs. 1 , Note 2. VERBS. 195 VII. NEUTER VERBS. I. The conjugation of the simple tenses of neuter verbs, differs in nothing from that of the active, except in their compound tenses, which some- times take Ijctbett, sometimes fettt, as an aux- iliary. II. English neuter verbs being almost uniformly in their comp. tenses conjugated with the verb „to have/' and the student's propensity natu- rally inclining to render them by the corre- sponding auxiliary in German: it would be useless to enumerate ■ — as most grammarians have hitherto done — a perplexing variety of rules on the employment of the verb £abett , since it will only be necessary to state those cases, where the verb fettt must he employed. III. @ettt is to be employed 1. Whenever the neuter verb expresses a change or transition from one state to another, as : aufwadjen , to awake ; fterbett , to die ; f$meljen, to melt; fctutett, to rot; gettefett, to get well ; erfrctttfett , to be taken ill etc. 2. Whenever they show a directed motion attended with change of locality, as : Ctbfal)rett, to start, to set off; abfaftm, to fall off; ctltS* rettett, to take a ride; begegttett, to meet; ge* f>ett, to go; retfen, to travel; fc^tetc^ett, to sneak , to prowl etc. * 1 SBletben, to remain; begegtten, to meet; gelingen, to succeed ; gefc^efyen , to happen ? — though not correspond- 196 VERBS. IV. Some neuter verbs may also be used transi- tively ; and are then of course conjugated with |mben; as, dx fwt geettt (nut fetner 9?eife) , he has been in a hurry (with his journey) ; but we must say, (£r tft geetlt (nct$ fcer ©tabt), he has hastened to town. 3d) Jjafce ben $w$$ nub metn 33ruber fjert ben ©4)tmme( gerttten, I was riding- the bay horse, and my brother the gray ; but ®te fmb gerttten nafy ber ©tabt, they have rode to town. V. Every active verb receives the neuter form by means of fetn, when its Part. Past is taken as a predicate ; as , £)er 9J?cmn tft gefef)rt, the man is learned. £te grew tft tt)ol)l unterrtc^tet, the woman is well informed. T)a$ £aus tft gebaitt, the house is built. £)a£ 33ucf) tft gebntcft, the book is printed. ing with the above definitions, are nevertheless conjuga- ted with fetn ; £Bo ift cr geblteben? where does he stay? (Ex ift ^u <§aufe geblteben, he has stayed at home. SSon feitten 9tetd)tt)umern ift iimx nidjts ati bte (£rinnerung geblteben, of his riches, he has nothing left, but the recoUection. 2ft cm irollte i>tcle SSerctnberungen twneljmen, after e3 ift alte6 fcetm Sllten geblieben, they intended great changes, but every thing was left as of old. VERBS. 197 These predicates may also be turned into attributive adjectives 2 ; din geleprter STOamu Sine ttoftf untmifytetc grew* In translating such phrases from the English, care must be had not to mistake the passive for the neuter form ; for 3 27i£ ?n*m is praised, may mean ber SPtatttt n>irb gefobi (is being praised) or, bet WldtiXt ift getobt (is praised). In speaking of things , there can seldom be a doubt , since phrases of this kind are, in English , always connected with the Part Press . a; The book is printing > bag Surf) ttUtb gebrudfc. The house is building, bag $aug toirb gebaut* Exercise XXXV. You will find no more swamps in that neighbour- hood, for the standing waters have mostly eva- der* porated. More than three hundred storks assem- bunften @tor<$ m. ft<$ »er* bled in a field close to a neighbouring village ; fammeln but when some of the peasants came there the next morning, they had all disappeared. I have come tterfcfjnrinben aWommen off my road, can you not direct me. This years son jurecfytwetfett peurtg - Compare Exerc. XXVIII. , obs. 3, Note 2. 198 VERBS. harvest has been good, corn * has come down in @rnte gruc^t ( abfc^tagen price. They had long poles, with which they ) ©tcmge/: struck the fruit from the trees. Those hayricks ctfcfcfylagen Dbftrc. £eufdjofrer have probably been burnt because the hay had wxhntmn not sufficiently dried. If they had exposed it more trocfnen au3fe£ett to the air, it would have dried better and it could ## Sufi/. not have ignited. — He is well adapted for such ft$ entjihtben pajjen an office , for he has much travelled. You will not ©tetfe find him here, he has travelled to France. Great contention has arisen between the parties. He ©treitm. entftel^en would have hastened away, if I had not stopped forteifen him. You have succeeded in*** convincing Qdat.J gettngen (impers.J me, and I am glad to own my error. The time ftc^freuen emgefteljen has approached, when all such abuses will be I)ercmnal)en 9fttprau$ * Exerc. XXXIII., obs. I., Note II. ** Exerc. XXV., obs. 1. *** Exerc. VI., obs. 1. VERBS. 199 done away with. He has dropped down. He has t ctfcfdmffen ~) meberfatfen dropped the things. They have been riding all fatten laffen the morning. They have rode into the country 5 he auf has rode after him. If that bay mare had been well nad^retten managed, she would have trotted well. She had 6ef>anfcetn trotted as far as the fifteenth milestone, and f$on ( MS ) jum ^etlenjetger was then obliged to give up the race. I have often remten swum during this summer; they had swum after him but could not overtake him. ein^oten Exercise XXXVI. They had marched all day long, without a draught Xxnnt m. of water ; the troops have marched through our city. The police-officers came too late, for the ^oltjetbtener thieves had already run away. There was a noise bason remten as if the thunder had been rolling. The cottages Spixttef. at the foot of the mountain were dashed to pieces jerfc^meftern by the immense fragments of rock that had rolled ungeijeuer gelfenjlutf 200 VERBS. down. The troopes have moved into their encamp- Innctb riicfen ttt ments. The allied troops have joined them. He has fto£ert £u jumped over the ditch ; the fountain has played all fpringen gontatne fprtngen day long. They had danced for many hours before they thought of returning home. — They are bctran nadj £aufe the same couple that have danced from the room into the hall. You are astonished that he limps; he fyinhn has limped from his infancy. He has hobbled into feit Stnb|>ett fjinfett the next street. The vessel is stranded. They are fttcmfcert making great efforts. — I am mistaken , it is being Stnftrengung saved. Now it is saved. He has fallen round his * retten neck and wept for joy. It would have fallen down, ft> emeu if I had not held it. His friends have dealt hard tterfctljvett with him; he has been on a journey, and has spent tterretfett all his money in travelling, and they would not** give him any ** more. Having *** hurried through * V. Poss. Prons. P. 45. ** P. 58, 1. 5. *** Exerc. XXVII. , obs. i. VERBS. 201 the town > he had not much time to see what was passing there. They had now passed into a narrow JDorgepen atifaitgen mg street leading* f towards the hotel, when they heard behind them the clatter of hoofs. When they had £uffdj(ag walked out in the still evenings of summer and augge£en an ©ommerabenb then returned to their humble cottage, there was in befdjeiben no pleasure to equal ! theirs. The poor woman g(et$foinmen had sunk upon the ground utterly overpowered by 53oben gcinjltcty ubertx>dlttgt her feelings. @efii£t Exercise XXXVII. I have just come from your garden and perceived that your best flowers have done blooming. A Jn'tfrfcf) tferbftiljcn great many have withered from the want of uerwetfen cms ~ SWangef an rain, many others have perished from want 3tegen ju ®runbe gepen of care during my absence. She used to be very Sorgfaft delicate, but since her residence on the continent fcf)tt>derben the eldest boy, have grown very thin; the boy magcr has certainly grown tall and strong. Your children tuber JE$at are very small, they seem as if they would never grow ; you are mistaken , they have lately fett fturjem grown a good deal. Fray* can you tell me $tcmlt$ met m$t * what has become of your friend captain ** S. — I CMS cannot ***. The last time 1 heard from him, which may now be a full twelvemonth ; he fd&on gcmj 3at)r informed me that he had just returned from untemcfyten gerctbe America and had got on board again to proceed an Sorb gepen na$ ft$ fcege&en to China. He had not proceeded very far in his fommen story when he bluntly told him he did not be- Srjaltfung gerabeju lieve a word of it. He was in a great rage and fepr aufgekcui)t * Pray in colloquial discourse is seldom rendred in German; the verb in such phrases is frequently used ne- gatively ; sometimes also bod) is substituted. ** Exerc. XXX. , obs. 3 and XXXIIL , obs. 1. &** Exerc. III., obs. 1. VERBS. 203 had turned very pale. 1 understand his brother werten bfa§ l)oxt has removed to P. He would f have removed to jte^en rtac^> some other place, but his wife's relations have all etn Ort fein property there. It is surprizing to see how soon fregitiert fd;neft that young boy had climbed up that tree. They ffettern auf had not advanced above a few hundred yards , wxxMm eintge when they were obliged to save themselves by retten flight. That general had fallen and his army had §Iu$t fatten £eer been routed chiefly through the artifices jernidjten pauptfa$Itc$ 2lrgltfl/*.sm#. of one of his favourites. It is evident he has augenf$etnft$ fallen a sacrifice to his credulity. — He had es- ?et<$tgldu6tgfett cnU caped so many dangers, but his fate was sealed rumen £dat.) iooon. ftegeln and he has perished by the hands of a flatterer. uniergejjen f Exerc, XXV., obs. 1. 14 204 VERBS. GOVERNMENT OF VERBS The verbs govern I. the Genitive ; II. the Dative ; III. the Accusative; IV. the Accusative and Genitive ; V. the Accusative and Dative ; VI. certain prepositions. The Genitive is required a D by ^ e following verbs, acfyten, l to mind. mtgbranctyen, 2 to make a bad bebntfen, >. \ brancfyen, j „ want. pjlegen, 2 use of. „ devote one- benfen, 3 j gebenfen, i „ think of. fcfyonen, 2 self to. 6 „ spare. entbefyvcn, 2 „ miss. * fern, 7 » be. ertocifynen, ? , mention. jlerben, 7 „ die. gebvandfyen, 2 „ use. toerben, 7 » Set. geniefjen, 2 '» enjoy. fjpottcn, 8 „ deride. barren, „ wait an- sergeffen, 2 „ forget. xiously. toafyrnefymen, 2 „ perceive. ladjen, 5 „ laugh at. ratten, 9 ^ wait. 1 In this sense used in a few phrases only. But acfyten, to respect j governs the ace. 2 The Ace. preferred in colloquial discourse. 3 More frequently with the prep. an. * To do without, to dispense with. 5 More usually with ttber. 6 To nurse, cherish, take care of. 7 Only in a few peculiar phrases ; as, bc6 £obe$ — , gn^ ten Wluti)e$ fefyn, to be struck dead, —to be of good cheer. (§inz$ ^lo^licfyen £obe3 ftetben, to die suddenly. £)e$ £enfel£ ttevben, to get deucedly vexed. 8 When signifying to mock at, it is mostly used with the prep, itber (with the ace). 9 More generally with cmf. 205 6) by verbs * in connection with the following adjectives, bet>itvftig, , { mdcfytig , master of. bendttjigt, i bejiiffen , in want of. intent upon. miibe, fan, ( tired of. befugt, entitled to. fdjuibig , guilty of. eiugebetif, l0 mindful of. tijeityaft, sharing iu. fd^'g, capable of. iiberbruffig , weary of. ftotj , glad of. unfa M g , incapable of. getoafyt, aware of. oerbttd^en, M grown pale. a,ennfj, l0 certain of. unttmrbig, unworthy of. ansdrtig , expecting. tterlitftig, forfeited. funbig, ,0 acquainted serf defy tig , suspected of. with. twit, full of. letug, quit of. toettty ** worth. lo$, rid of. ftmrbtg , worthy of. cj by verbs connected with nouns indicative of consecutive time , place and manner ; as , be$ I2 SftovgettS lefen, to read of a , morning. bes *ftatfjt$ rulj «i to rest at ni ght. SD^outa^^ ©efellfcfyaft empfatu to receive company on gen. mondays. allct- Drteu, every where fotgenbcr ©ejialt, following manner. eiienben £aufe$ f with hasty s ;tep. geraben 2£ege$ t straight waj 'S. feines (£radjten$, to his opinion. metnes SBiffenS , to my know ledge. ftetjenben gufte* *. on one's leg: 5. * These principally are, fein, toerbcn, fcfyctnen, fommeit, gefyen. 10 Also with the negative un; as, unemgebettf, mifdljig etc. 11 Only used with, beS SobeS — to have died. ** V. P. 210, Obs. 26. 12 Also without the art. V. also Adverbs R. 3 206 VERBS. II. The Dative by aj the following intransitive verbs. abgefyen, to want. banfen, to thank. ab rat I; en, „ dissuade. btenen, „ serve. abneln, „ bear broken, 99 threathen. some resem, efein, I3 99 loath. blance. einleu$teii, „ be obvious. angefyoren, „ belong to. e in ft el* en, i9 answer for. anljtitigen, 99 adhere to. entfallen, ,, fall from. anftefyen , „ suit. entftiefyen, \ antuwten, „ answer. entfafjren, 1 auf fallen , M surprise. entgcljen, f antiegen, „ urge. entlaufen , \ 99 escape from auf (i elf en, „ help up. entfpiingen, auflauern , „ lie in wait enttceicfyen, 1 for. eutnnfdjen, aufpaffeu, „ watch for. entfagen, 99 renounce. auftoatten , 9% wait upon. entered) en, 99 answer. F * auSfyelfen , 99 assist. entftcfjen , „ arise. auoiveicfyen , „ make way enttoadjfen, „grow from. for. erlauben, 99 allow. befeljlen, „ command. evfd)einen, ,. appear. begeanen, „ meet 9 hap- erttarten, ,5 99 expect. pen. evtocifen, „ show to. beljagen, „ feel pleased. eninebevn , 99 reply. betfommeu, „ get at. fefylen, „ be wanting. beivfticfyten, 1 feljlfdjlagen, „ fail. beiftimmen, 1 „ agree with. pud) en - 99 curse. bettreten , folgen, „ follow. beifiefyen, „ assist. fvbb,nen, 99 minister. ,6 Heibtn, to remain. gcbufjren, „ be due. 13 When used impersonally- 9 it requires the Ace. ns 9 t& efelt mid) box ber ©petfe, I am disgusted at that food. 14 As, expectations. T5 In the sense of to wait for. it req. the x\cc. 16 As, to passions. 20? gefallen, gelwrctyen, gepren, an gel; or en , gelingen , giiufen, geratfyen f gebeiljen, getrogeit, geretcfeen, ge(cf>ef)en , gejiaiten, gqiemeu, Uemen, glaubeu, gletdjen, (jiilbigen, f often, lacfyeln, lendjten, (ofytten , mangeln, mif fallen , to please. w obey. j „ belong to. 17 ^ succeed. ^ suffice. „ reach to, „ happen to. ?3 permit, I . j ^ be proper. 55 believe. „ resemble. 55 do homage. 5, cost. ^ smile. 55 give light. ^ reward. 55 be deficient in. ^ displease. mtjgglficfen , | mijjlmgen , I nadjafymen , nacfygefcen, IC nu|cn, 20 paffen, rati) en , fagen, 2r fcfeaben, fdjemeh, fdjmecfen, T7 fdjmeitfjcht, fcfy woven , ftenern, ftaueii , tro|en, unteriiegen, oerbieten, oevgcbcn , serjeifyen, perfaaen, uerficfyem , yorarbeiten, ttorfreugen, to fail. 55 imitate. ,5 yield. „ be of use, 55 fit. 55 advise, 55 tell. » injure. 55 appear. 55 taste, 55 flatter. ? 5 swear. 55 put a stop to 55 trust. ,5 defy. 550vercomeby .5 forbid. 5, pardon. 55 deny. ,5 assure. 55 prepare. .j prevent. V. Exerc. IX. obs. 2. implies means to a certain effect, as: (i$ ^xzi&jt mtrjum befonbern SSergttugen, bet* Ueberbrtnger riefev angcneljmen 93ot- fcnaft ju fein, I feel a particular pleasure in being the mes- senger of such agreeable intelligence. 19 And most other verbs with nacr). i0 !tftnt$en, to make use of, to use, is active and governs the Ace. In this sense , benn|en is mostly made use of. 2r When signifying to say, to mention it requires the Ace, as; Sagen (Etc e3 ntdjt ixuebcr, do not say it again; Sagen ®ie tnir toaS gibt t$ *ftene£? tell me what is the news? 208 VERBS. tforfommeit, to appear. gu^eftcl;e:i , to grant. roel)veti , „ defend. gul; oven , glisten to. wtifyen , „ give way. jmmttfyen, „ demand. 2 - rctoerfafyren, „ happen to. juvufen , „ call out to. ttuberjpvedjeii, „ contradict. gnfagett, „ suit. wiser jfrfyen, . . juftogeu , „ happen to. totberfkeben, „ resist. $ufei)en, „ look at. irtllfafyren, „ comply juttinfcn, „ pledge, with. drink to. nnnfen, „ beckon. ju&orfommeu, „ anticipate. wofylweUeu, 9i mean well. jutmttfen, „ beckon to. Note. Many other intransitive verbs compounded with ab, an, cmf, bet, em, tntgegetr, nacfy, untcr, soot: and $u go- vern this case , being in most instances required by the prepositions. bj The following impersonal verbs, (£$ aljr.et mix, befcmmt mtr, fdltt mix bet, fdttt miv ein, bducfyt mix, ^ tunft miv, efett mtr ttor, entfdUt mtr , entgcfyet mix, feljlt mtr, gebrtdjt mtr, gelutgt mtr, ajlt mtr Qleici), glitcft mtr, grant mir »ov, grd'uelt mtr r>or, Fcmmt mtr nicl>t an auf, I forebode. it agrees with me. it occurs to me, it seems to me. I am loath. I forget. it escapes from. I am in want of, I miss. I am in want. I succeed. it is the same to me. I succeed. I am horrified at. I do not mind for. 11 In the sense of to impose on. 23 More generally used with the Ace. VERBS. 209 (£3 fcmmt $u i jldjeu, it stands me. „ fdjcmbert mtr , I shudder at. „ fcr/uunbcl: r mtr, I feel giddy. „ fcfy humeri :, e3 fd^n?ebt mir it is glimmering; hovering 001' ben Slugen, before my eyes. r, tl;ut mrr left), I am sorry. „ trdumt i( >nt, he dreams. „ nmrmt tfj m, it annoys him. O By verbs * connected with the following adjectives ? abgeneigt, disinclined. emleucfytcnb, clear. d^nltdj, like. cintrdgitdi , productive. angeboren, innate. eiitbeijtltd), dispensible. awgeljihrtg, belonging. ergeben, devoted. angelegen, concerned for er tragi id), tolerable. an g em e (Ten , suitable. ertomtfdjjt, desirable. angeneinn, agreeable. fetl , saleable. anljdngig , attached. feints hostile. anficptg, offensive. fret, free. drgerftcfy , vexatious. fremb , strange. bange, afraid. \ freunfclid) , kind. bebent(tcr), critical. geijorfam , obedient. fcegreijlid) , conceivable. gelegcn, opportune. befyaglidj, comfortable. geneigt, inclined. befynljM), serviceable. getoadtfen, competent. befannt; known. getiwgen, favourable. beliebtg, agreeable. gletdj, equal to. bequem, convenient. gleicr)giiitig , indifferent. befdjtuerlidj , troublesome. gndbtg, gracious. beimrjjt, coucious. gihtfitg , favourable. batifbar, 24 grateful. gut , good. bier, ltd), serviceable. ijcilfam, wholesome etgen, 1 i- for. ctgeurtmmltcr) j peculiar. r)inberlid), disturbing. Mostly the same as noticed P. 205 And others in bar. 210 VKRBS. Ijeifc, hot. imauefte!)lict) , unbearable. Ijolb, favourable. unbefcbabet, without det- Hot, plain. riment. laftig, troublesome. unsergetUid), not to be for- leidjt, easy. gotten. left, sorry. unserfyofft, unexpectedly lie*, dear. tterantrcortltcl), , responsible. fait, cold. Derbunben, obliged. mogltd) , possible. yerbcrblid), injurious. nad)tf)ei(tg, injurious. tterbrtefrlidj , vexatious. nalje, near. aerljafjt, hateful. nStljtg, , I tfetjMnbltcfy, intelligible. notbttenbtg, i necessary. uettoanbt, related. uu|ltcb, useful. m$etbltcf), pardonable. petnlid) , painful. fcimfyeilbaft, advantageous tecfyt, right. ft arm, warm. fcfydblicfy, injurious. ftertl], 26 dear. fcf)meict)eU;aft, flattering. ttncfytia, important. ftf)mer$tyaft, painful. tptberltc^, disgusting. fcfytecfltd), terrible. hubevtodrttg, adverse. fdjulbtg, 25 owing. ttibrtg , contrary to. fcfitoer, difficult. unlif ommeu , welcome. fdjnnnbltdj , giddy. toofyl, well. feltfam , strange. ttumberbar, strange. treu , faithful. jugangfc'cf}, accessible. iibei, sick; ill. ^u get ban , attached. itberXegen , superior. jutragltd) , beneficial. itbrig, over, remain- ing. §tt>ctfelf)aft, doubtful. - b When meaning „gnilty op' it governs the Gen. 28 In this sense it requires the Dat. \ in all others the Gen., except it stand in connection with a number speci- fying the value of a thing: when it governs the Ace. case. V. Exerc. IV. obs. 1. VERBS. 211 III. The Accusative by a) all transitive verbs, and the auxiliary Ijaben ; 6J most refl. verbs ; c) neut. verbs when used transitively (P. 196, R. IV.) ; d) neut. verbs in some peculiar phrases ; as , einen ©ctng gejjen, to go on some errand; einen (cmgen ©a)Iaf fd)(afen; etn 35eifpict nacfjafjmen; «_) neut. verbs used reflectively ; as, iti) gef>e, ftefje, ftge mtd) rnube etc; er fcfyrei&t ftd) fcftnb, fmftet ftd) ju Stobe 5 /9 many impers. verbs when used actively (im- pers. verbs , R. III. and Note I.) ; g) Substantives expressive of a positive relation of time ; as (in dating letters or documents), ben jefmten 9J?drj , the tenth of March ; i&) werbe biefen yiafymitta$ $u 3#nen fomnten, I shall come to you this afternoon (Exerc. XXXIII., obs. 4); h) eg gie&t , when signifying eg ifi ; as : eg giebt einen ®ott, there is a god; eg giebt fetnen SJJenfdjen , ben id) me|r ad;te ; there is no man I esteem more ; i) some elliptical or poetical phrases; as: bag @d;tt)ert in ber £anb, sword in hand, i. e. nut bem©4)tt>ert etc.; ben£>oW) im ©ewcmbe, having the dagger beneath his dress ; k) the following adjs. when used with substs. denoting dimension or value ; breit, broad, wide; bicf, thick; grot?, large; |)0d), high; tang, long; writ , far; fcf)ft>er, heavy; tynty , worth (v. obs. 26). 212 IV. The Accusative and Genitive by aj the following verbs, taking the person (or first objecf) in the Ace. ? and thing (or sec- ond object) in the Gen. 27 ; anflagen, 28 to accuse of. entlaffen, j to dismiss belefyren, " » advise, in- entfegen, j from. struct. iiberfufyveti, ( • . bevaubzn, 30 ,. strip of , ubeilvetfen , j yy convict. rob. uberfyeben, „ relieve from befcfyulbigen, itbeqeugen, 3f y, convince. be^itcfyttgen, j „ accuse. sevweifen, „ banish. entbtnben, j 9 y relieve, uevftdjern, yy assure. cntlaben, i disburden. ttmrbtgen , „ honour with entfyeben, f y dispense geifjen, yy accuse, im- from. peach. b) many reflective verbs ; the refl. pron. repre- senting the person (or first object), and the Gen. the thing (second objecf) ;■ as, ffd) annejjmen 32 ft(| bebtenen 33 ft$ befletgtgen 27 Person and thing, are here as elsewhere to be un- derstood only as grammatical expressions^ and not to imply any reference to the former as an animate and the latter as an inanimate object. 28 (£r flctgte itjn einc^ fd&toeren £krbred>eng an, he accused him of a heavy crime. * 9 (It belefyrte jid; cines SBeffetn, he advised (bethought) himself better Con this or that subject}. 30 Seiner SGBurbcn bevanbt toerben, to be stripped of one's honours. 3r In most cases the second object is joined to this verb by means of the preposition tton. 33 (5r mrnmt jtdj Dei Slvmen unb Unglitcfltcfyen an, he takes the part of the poor and unfortunate. (See also P. 179 Obs. ly Ex. 2). 33 (£t bebtent ftd? ber SWittel, bie ifym $u ®cbote jiefjen, he VERBS. 213 ftd; frege&en „ entjjalten fufi erwe^ren „ bemdcf)ttgcn „ entfd;lagen „ freuen ss „ bemetftern „ entfmnen f/ riifittien Tf befc^etben „ ertnnern 34 „ fdwmen* „ 6efmnen „ erbarmen 35 V. The Accusative und Dative by a) most transitive verbs governing two cases , where the person (or first object)^ for whose advantage or disadvantage a thing is done, is placed in the Dat. , and the thing (or se- cond object) in the Ace. case. e. g. 3$ ttunfdje 3#nen eine gute yiwfyt, I wish you a good night. (£r gett>al)rte miv bie S3ttte, he granted me the favour. Set&en @ie miv 3£t SBorteibuc^, lend me your dictionary. Note. In many instances the construction is the same in English especially when the cases stand reversed; as. You may show it to me ; al)ten, „ grant. ftetfyen, „ consecrate glauben , „put faith in. toibmen, „ devote. gonnen, . „ not to ttmnfcfyen, „ wish. grudge. Setgen, „ show. feolen, .. fetch. etc. etc. Cv. also P. 45 Rs. 1 and 2.) VI. Verbs require certain prepositions. 1. Sin (with the dat.) a) By the verbs ftd) ergcgen an etwaz, to delight in something, tetben an etvoa$, to suffer from something, jlerfren an ettt)a£, to die from some (certain) cause, *>erjtt>etfeltt,j eg fejjft mtr an et\x>a$, eg mangel* mtr an etwag, . c ,,, . , 3 I certain thing J , eg gebrtc^t mtr an efttxts, 1 & ; eg Itegt an mtr, it lies with me (it is my doing, my fault). an etwag , to despair of a thing. / I am in want of (a VERBS. 215 6) By verbs * connected with the following adjectives , d^n(icf) , similar to f fetn , little in arm , poor in franf / ill of gtetcf> , equal in leer, void of grog , great in ret$ , rich in c) By fmben or futbett, when connected with the substantives j greube, joy @d)u£, protection ©efaUen , pleasure Xxo\t , comfort «uji, delight 2. ?Jfa (with the Ace.) by the verbs cmbmben , binben, i benf en **; to think of gett>o£nen, to accustom to 3. 2tof (with the Dat.) by fceru^en, to depend on fcefleljen, to insist upon 4. 2luf (with the Ace.) , by cmfommen, to depend on ftrf) t>erlaffen, to rely upon eiferfuc^tig , jealous ^erjtc^ten , to renounce ftof l , proud ftarten f , to w^ait for 5. 2Iu£ or in (with the Dat.) by beftefien, to consist of. 6. 33et (or sometimes in , with the Dat.) by befjarren. bletbett, to persevere in. to tie to glaubett f to believe in ertnnew,| to remind of maljnen , ftd?tt>enben,toapplyto * V. P. 205 *. ** V. P. 204, obs. 3. *** v. P. 213, obs .34. t V. P. 204, obs. 9. 216 VERBS. giir (with the Ace.) may be used, by many of the adjs. which in connection with certain verbs require the Dat. Also in familiar dis- course after some of the verbs governing the Dat. * 8. Uekr (with the Ace.) by jid) evbarmen,** to take pity flaxen, on. „ erftaunen, i „ be aston- „ is imtern, i ished at. „ freuen, ** „ rejoice at. frol)lo(fett. ,, glory at. ftdj beffogeit, lacfyen, *** lacfyeln, t fpotten, tt fpcttein, to complain of. „ laugh at. „ smile at. „ mock at. 9. SSor (with the Dat.) by beben, bev^eu, ftd) efeln, etfcfyiecfen, jtd) entfe|en, fid) futdjten, graueit (impers.) jtdj fjuien, „ fefydmen, „ freuen, „ fcetbercjen, „ loerfleKen, jittern. to tremble at. „ shelter from. „ be disgusted at. „ be frightened at. „ be startled at. „ flee from. „ be afraid of. „ be horrified at. „ beware. ,, be ashamed of. „ be abashed. „ conceal from. „ dissemble. „ tremble at. * In most instances it is the same in English; as, (§6 ift (eincm Otuf natyttyilxQ , or fat feuieu dluf — it is injurious to, or for his reputation. (£$ i|l mix, or fitv micfy jefjv unbequem, it is very incon- venient to , or for me. ** V. P. 213, obs. 35. *** y. p. 204, obs. 5. t More frequently with the dat. Sometimes also with $u. tt V". P. 204, obs. 8. PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 2 17 Also fterben, when corresponding to ^to die with," as, wx $mtgcr , Ratte, SXn^fl , greuta etc. fterben. PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. Note. The numbers above the line show the order of words. The numbers below the line refer to the page in the Grammar, where the particular rule will be found. The number between two words^ shows that these and the following words go together , till in- terrupted by an intervening rule or the next number in order. An isolated number 1, shows the sentence to open with the word over which it stands, SEMIRAMIS. Semiramis was a woman of a manly spirit. 28etb nut @eele She * had reluctantly obeyed her husband, and ungem ge$wr$en 207 Wlann * Ought to agree with the noun it relates to (P. 104). iJowever j to comply with this rule in every instance where the words 2Beib, QJidtcfyen, graulem, occur, does not seem very practicable (except in the rel. pron.), especially when it becomes necessary to refer frequently to the antedecent noun. The use of the Fern. Personal and Pos- sessive Pronouns in such cases is certainly more expres- sive; and writers, who are carried on more by their feelings than by the exact observance of rules that take their origin in absurdity or neglect , alike offensive to etymology and to nature: not uufrequently fall into this pardonable — nay preferable — error, both in prose and poetry. Thus ScfytUet in one of his poems (£as 2Mbdjen am bet : gvembe), in twenty four lines, disregards, no less than six times , this rule of Grammar. 15 218 promiscuous exercises. Avas now to be governed by a son To 117 ftd) faffeti inf. ,65 wn tyx this she was averse ; yet she could not hope \\id)t tooffen unt> 9I that a courageous and warlike people would be ftd) subjected to a woman. Nevertheless she discovered utUfWerfen 3nbe£ ftnben Ql some 2 confidants among ] the friends of her hus- band, with whom she agreed to pass herself jtdj tterafereben au&jefeen off for Ninyas. She an as of the same height, had 188 fo grog n>te er nearly the figure, countenance, and the manly voice 2Bud;S m. ©ejidjt of Ninyas. But to deceive the people the easier, tlnb 96 nod? she introduced a garb which covered the arms, Xvad)t feet, breast and hair, which is still the custom f^pl.J *me ffc 97 ncd))eiAt vjetvofmftd) in most eastern countries. In this attire she 9Ror presented herself to the people in the place of QiassiveJ f ftatt ) Ninyas, whom they concealed among the . 3)er3ungftng man tvrftecfcn l04 women and girls where he felt quite at his 97 ftcf> beftnbcn goitj ease; and the people obeyed her as they had xoopl, PROMISCUOUS EXERCrSKS. 219 formerly done to her husband. The first thing guwr ^' 63 16 wai she did was the restoration and embellishment jperfteflim^ Sfasjtcrttitg of Babylon, It is scarcely credible what has been i>en ungfctubftd; man 125 recorded of (he magnificence of this ades erjdbfen (pres.^J tyvatyt City. After she had superintended the building cutortmen {past. party* 33au m. of it, she travelled about her country and 104 um^er in procured also for other towns the necessary con- nctptg (>/.) venience and splendour. At the same time fcbmftdfenb, ©tctnj m. ( sugtetc^ 9 ' ) she endeavoured to sound the minds of the people; fuc^en erforfc^en ©emtttb and finding them all inclined to her, she entered ,6Q q7 net^en 3g aufftreten in a large assembly of the people, and told them that SBoIfc&erfammfunq entbecfen J ' 2697 she was the widow of the former king, and not CpresJ his sonNinyas. You love me, said she and honour reffen fpuec^en *>eretjren me. If the name is the occasion of that, you now C ma$en 1 fo 95 know that I am not called Ninyas but Semiramis. fyetffcn fonbern * Scil. fyatte, which in the Pluperf. is often omitted, 15. 220 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. > i If it is on account of the sex, you know that I am ( macfyen ) 95 not a man, but a woman. If it is in consequence of 28etb C madjen ) 3 1 4 2 deeds, it is again myself who have always trie fo Mummer ify 53 97 performed them, whatever my name or person be! tpun icfy mag fyci$a\ ofcer fetn, wer t($ HriH Those who were ignorant of f the secret, were astonished ; but they were sensible of her great fuftfen merit, and all proclaimed her unanimously their 2Bert£ m. au^rufen eimmUfng jur queen. From that time, she no longer concealed her an mef;r tterljelrten sex, nor did her people diminish in their faith after ( nifyt weniger treu towards her. Once, as she was sitting to breiben 206 } ©rtjl eben 01 0l imb ftci> have* her hair platted, they came and informed iajfen 45 Q)l.J flecfyteu a(3 man anjetgen Y To be ignorant of something, urn ettvae nicfyt wiffeii. * To have, to get, to order, to command, to desire, to cause, to make, to suffer, to allow, and to permit, accompanying the Inf. or Past Part, of another verb, and standing in the sense of, to let , must be translated by laffen, with the following verb in the Infinitive (P. 165) e. g. I will get it copied, id; will c$ abfdjveifren faffen. PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 221 i her, that a - dangerous insurrection had broken A out * .. 206 eg 2lufrui;r {perf. subj.') With her hair flowing she threw herself in the («/•/.) fterabfttegenb ftiirjen midst of the rebels , commanded silence and all unttx Slufruprev gefeteten ©tttte d atteo obeyed. In commemoration of this insurrection , 3um an 2 almost * solely put 3 down by her personal ap- faft nitr jliffen 173 ©egen* pearance they erected her a statue in the same waxt f- man 213 attitude 2 she had shown herself 4 to the Stettung itnb tt>ie rebels, with l her flowing hair. I will order it to be bought, id) lmll ee faufeu lajfett. He commanded the ringleaders to be shot, ev liefj t>ie Ocdtel^fittyver etfdjiejjen. He desired the petitioners to be admitted, ev ltcfj tie 33ittfteiler oor jicfy ftmtmen. They caused him to be examined, fie liepen iijn m1)0fen. We made him read the letter, mix liejkn tfyn ten SBrief lefeu. Why did you suffer him to do it, trantm liejjen ®ie ibn e3 tt)im. He allowed him to escape, ei liefj ifyn entfommen. * P, 195 III. 222 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. CRGESUS. Cyrus had comdemned Croesus to the stake ; ©djeiterfwtfe fire being set to the pile of wood around ati man any'tnben him. and the flames already reaching him erflretfen l69 ber ttngfucfftcfje he was heard to exclaim, Solon! Solon! Wherc- 525 fdjreien tykx* upon Cyrus commanded the flames to be extin- auf befe^ten guished , and to bring the unhappy king into his fuljmi ni er presence, that he might learn the cause of this erfajjren exclamation. Croesus having recovered from nad)t>em I09 fid) evl;oIcn his terror, related at the request of 311 erjcif;ten beginnen auf 3Mtte the conqueror as follows. $otgcnfres 2 1 2 3 There came once a wise man out ofGreecetome named ' Solon. I showed him all my irea- mit s )lamen $ei$en laflen 2 ! ' sures, and was vain enough to hope he would be 164 ev , surprised * at my great wealth and call me the jiaunen fiber SWcfytfmm (>/.) (;et§en * Siibj. of Future-Infinitive. PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES 223 happiest of men. — As he remained silent 5 ailt ftber f$u>etgen and paid no more attention to them than if they hut cuifefjen bae 8ffe$ ) t$ had been as sand and pebbles, I said to him, Solon, [imp.subj.y Miefefitetn lu4 -" you have travelled all about the world and have bu bcrumrcifeii ] •* io wdt in seen many men; tell me whom do you consider \c i " 7 bafrcn ffn the happiest? Solon answered: a citizen of Athens, Jltr-en Tellus. I was amazed that he preferred a common fid) ftitnbera ]lfj citizen to me, and continued to ask. why he con- wcitcx fragen bai-- sidered him happy? lie said. Tellus lived at ten ber ffit glucffeltg fpredjcii Athens wlien that City was in its most flourishing DtC condition. lie had chiidern, and grand childem, 3ufianb ftuibrdfint and had not lost any; he enjoyed a sufficient com- me etn ( fetn genugenbes pctence that satisfied all liis wants, and in this iHusfonimcn jjafceii ) manner, happy and contented, he attained an ad- getangen ju vanccd age and died in a victorious engagement be* ,€ rvefren " ?24 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. for his native country , which out of gratitude aSaferfanb tmbbtefeS aue erected him a monument in commemoration of his Fefeen ( 2)enfma( ) deeds. But after him, whom do you consider ber fur the happiest man *? Two Grecian youths, ans- wered he, Cleobis and Biton; they were very well off *, and possessed so much dexterity and strength of body that they both carried off at the same Zeibm. ,42 bcttton tvagen ( ju- time the prize at one of our Olympic games, gW#) tyvti* m. in ^ampffpief n. Moreover they entertained such tender affection £)abet fwben fo em tnmg Stebe for their aged mother, that the latter being de- ju gretfe t>a§ aid bicfe woU sirous of attending a sacrifice in the temple of ten fasten ju Juno, and the oxen having gone astray, they ausMetben both harnessed themselves 2 to the cart, and drew fpannen an Sffiagen their mother to the temple. The Greeks stand- Ms ju ^IS 109 um£er* ing 2 around were astonished, the men extoll- flepen (imp.} h cwunb cm (pres. part.') evfye* ing the virtue of the youths, and the women ben (imp.) * fo frtemiid) fcmtttclt fetn. PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. £60 prizing the woman happy, who had given birth to * fettg such sons, the happy mother was so much af- xty* fected that she prayed at the altar of the goddess ren t>or jur to ffive her children that which she thought )ie moge was 97 fatten most suitable for them. After the repast fttv 33efte }G berfelbe. Unb ,04 9! 9ft$l$eit the youths laid themselves down in the temple to 2 13 3 12 sleep and never woke again. But the Greeks ntdji erttac^en l0fl erected columns, in commemoration of their deed tfmen G^renfctule ju ©enfmctl and their beautiful death. On hearing this, con- %tt\$ 169 tinued Crcesus, I could no longer withhold my indig- fatten Ver- nation and said, Solon ? thou 2 despisest my hap- bruf} fonbern 91 ©fitcf- piness so ' much that thon wilt not 2 even feltgfett 9T cmd; mcfyt etnmal compare me with 3 these youths? And Solon 3 2 I answered , ! Crcesus man must long ** behold mtr l89 fe£en many things which he has no desire of behold- tneleS wao ~ r\id)t itumfc^en ~ 96 * to give birth to _. gebaren. ** 3n cincv lamicn 3eit, 226 PROMISCUOUS EXEIICISES. ing, aiid undergo many sufferings he would teiben tuefes ,wae 97 mocjeu willingly escape. Croesus ! thou art the possessor geme afctt>enben. ein £>evr of much wealthy and the ruler of many nations; ©liter aSoff n but I would not 2 call thee happy till I know (future) et?er ate tag thou hast had a happy end. There are many aud) (subj.) 44 geben who with every superfluity are not happy ; and bet all Uefcerflugw. 2 1 others again who with moderate wealth en- mtttefma§tg 3?et$tlnun (plO ge* joy the greatest happiness. For he who feels no me#en ' 204 ^od) 2 tx>er nur want, can enjoy more health in J peaceful lowiness, fetn gefunfc ftil( s Jtiebrigfeit suffer less evil, possess more bodily strength, 93ofeS' ffraft and more spiritual gifts, can educate his childern 3 2 :» i better; and if then he meet a J good end, then v.od) funjufommen he is what thou seekest for — a happy man. gliicffeltg Wlamx ■l 2 I The Gods heap their benefits on many, but be- iifccrpufen mit fore they are aware of it they are despoiled of el)e man (eg fid) wvfcfociO (ncfmien fie tbnen allee PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES* 227 everv thing, and cast lower than they had l;trm)eg ) flitrjen fie tief biefet&en before been raised. 5itoov erpljeti Thus spake the sage, related Crcesus ; but I 3 1 ,. 2 despised him, and never allowed * him to be me nneter 22 ° admitted again into my presence. From that ** time every thing went wrong with me. My eldest an 184 ,04 fibei 2 ' 2i0 son was dumb; my second was killed by a mtr umbringen friend; all cities , countries, nations and riches have I lost, and myself am now in thy power, id) felbfi jiegt ®e\valt Now r thou knowest why 1 cried Solon ; do now erfclgen by the enemy. He turned round, threw himself wr\ (pi) fity fliirjen atfetti 2 1 in the midst of the enemy , killed many, dispersed unter mitten (pi.) the rest and saved the 2 life of Socrates. He 213 i was afterwards obliged to leave Athens and to fydtev miiffen ftct; flee to a Persian governor, who was going to pc^tenju ©tattfjatter rotten efeeu i send a 3 fleet to assist the 2 Spartans. Alcibiades 213 ju^uffe 213 208 3 2 however succeeded in frustrating (his scheme. eSgeKngt 208104 *>emte(n 96 1 fufjreti and led himself the Persian fleet against the 230 PROMISCUOUS KXEilC'ISKS. Spartans. But the Persian governor for his own urn ftct> ftd)er security judged it safest to cause him to be taken $ufteflen fur rat^fam fatten 22<} ,54 prisoner. He escaped , and was received with joy gefangen cntflte^en aufnejnnctt cuts* and enthusiasm by the Athenians ; and under his fdjwetfeitbe greube command the Spartans were entirely defeated. cutf'e £aupi fctjfagen A single battle which was fought against the jiebod) will of Alcibiades was lost, and he was banish- serloren geljen ed a second time. The Athenians at last were defeated by land and by sea, and compelled to fc^fagen $u Saffet ftd) surrender on any terms, unbebtngt bem ©teger $u unterwerfen. The 5 conquerors, however not feeling themselves 6 1 ( feme 3 ©ic^erfiettbafetn* secure as l long as Alcibiades should continue to 4 fur ) fo inbe§ live, were longing for his death, and for that ; e3 aerlcmgcn fte na$ urn tyx purpose , set 5 Are , to his 3 house 3wetf ju erretcben fte in 33rcmb fe^en in 4 the night. Alcibiades awoke, wrapped him- wafnrenb * imp erf. PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. t6l self up in his cloak , and sword in hand mtted^ert 189 ,89 rushed * through the flames into the open air. fpvingen er in$ ftrete The cowardly incendiaries fled ; but from a SDforb&remter cntffie&en beef) cuts fcte secure distance shot at him with their arrows. ftctyer gerne fte auf and killed him. SOCRATES. When in a single city ; nay in a whole country, fa immorality reigns, it requires a great degree of bcfe Sitten * 5 J>etf> constancy to remain good and virtuous. Yet this gefitgfeft is by no means impossible ; and never is virtue 2 aberfeineewegs t 208 so completely destitute of esteem and affection gait;K$ e3 feftfi 208 an iHebe among other men. bet The 3 life of Socrates, one of the most noble l 1 8 2 l and sensible of men, will prove this. He was the aerfianbtg bewcifcn * Present tense; which in German is frequently done? in the animated historical stvle. 232 PROMISCUOUS KXEHCISES. son of a sculptor, and learnt this art with his father: 33tlt>£auer bet 4 1 but 2 did not at the same time negleet martial 3 aber au$ x>erfdumen exercise; and as we have already seen, herepeat- 1S9 (plJ me mcl^re* edly fought with courage and valour for his mate £apferfett native city. However neither sculpture nor $aierftabt bo# ,89 ©tfbfcauerei warfare were adapted to his genius; it was i80 $rieg3bienft cmmeffen 9tagung his favourite occupation to 2 instruct and to accom- ftebfi unterrtc^ten ( biU plish the minds of young l men who pleased him ben ) " 3ungltng 20e by their beauty and natural disposition ; and he * Shtldgen beg ©cifie^ •2 I willingly devoted his time to them without letting gem 154 himself be paid for it. 165 I His 2 instruction was not so formal a one as %\xfy Untevritfjt formlid; Untemct)* with us ; but he possessed a remarkable skill 6ei fonbevn ganjauggejeuijnct i in interrogating , and whilst he was engaged in J bag gxagen intern ° 7 jufammen fetn friendly conversation with 2 young men, he freunbfdjaftttd; Umgcmg PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 233 knew how to direct them by fit questions, that t>erjie£cn e£ ba^tnbrtngen pajfenb 2 they were 3 compelled to acknowledge in * their muffen feftft geftcfyen answers how much they were ignorant of, how no$ m'$t imffen ■ , * erroneous, much of that was, which they thought irrtg DteteS batten to be 4 true, and how much they neglected to fur fe^r improve the noble qualities of their hearts, and bie 23ereblung (sing^) 2 1 the exercise of good works. He spoke all this with bci£ @ute fctgen such force and affection that they willingly listened ®raft #er$K$fett wan florae tyxtn to him ; and his life was so pure and irreproach- 2 unlabel* able, that all those whom 5 he deemed worthy £aft bie ttertl? acfyten 3 I of his conversation, highly esteemed him and 4 Umgcmg m. fyofyafytm loved him. tieh geuunnen He lived just in the time of universal ctber demoralisation in Athens; and although the Grecian @ittem>erberbnijj ttriett>o£t - Subj. P. 118, 1. 16 234 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. i priests in 2 the name of their Gods declared him the wisest of men, the 3 number of his friends fur 2lnjaf)f i was n but small , and many a one whom he had boc^> manner won over, as for instance Alcibiades, was ftdj fc^on geimmten, tt>te ■ 88 again torn from him by ambition. The number of entrei^en 2IS ©S>rfu<$t his delracters and enemies on the other hand was 9?etber ( bagegen ) very great. TELESILLA. Telesilla, a lyric poetess of Argos, rendered 2)tct;ter 15 macf)en her country illustrious by her writings, and saved aSaterlanb Uxtymt ®tf)tiftf. 2 it by 1 her courage. The city of Argos was on fte auf the point of falling into the hands of the Lacedse- (dat^ m monians ; it had lost six thousand men, among fcerettS 67 tt>or* whom the flower of its youth. unter $ent 3ugenb war. 3 Telesilla collected the women most 2 proper to l serfammetn flef^tdt gu second her designs, furnished them with arms, 5lu^fu^rung(^w.)2So^akn t>erfe^en 2Baffen PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 235 which she provided from the temples or houses ftd) serfd)affen in s ]3ti* of individuals ; placed herself with them on t>ctt£auS befieigen fobamt the walls , and finally repulsed the enemy who,* $urucff$Iagen from fear of being reproached either with victory or defeat * retired from before the city. unb betyatb abjiepen The most signal honours were rendered to #0$ (5f;renbeseugung ju ££etf werben these female warriors, some of whom fell in the ^rteger 15 contest ; and a statue was erected in gratitude to ftatnpf au$ Telesilla, and placed in the temple of Venus, cmfjletten MATERNAL AFFECTION. Mary, Countess of Orkney, was both deaf and taub* dumb; she was married in the year 1753, by signs. ftumm unb Shortly after the birth of her first child, the nurse, 5lmme with considerable astonishment, saw the nifyt gettng gett>af)ren xoit * toeidje* ben er grofiten 25orft$f fnnfd;Iet$en (t#n/i.) jur cradle in which the infant was sleeping, evidently ctugenfdjetnfid) full of some deep design. ber Stuefitljrung einee gefjetmntf^often SSorpa- The Countess 3 having perfectly bens befd)ctfttgt. 169 ttoflfommen assured herself that the child really slept, itberjeugen fcblummern raised an immense stone which she had con- aufnefmien ungebeuer tfer* cealed under her shawl, and, to 3 the horror of bergen ©4)cm>f ©d)reden the nurse, (who was an Irishwoman, and like all 3r(ctnber 15 persons of the lower orders in her country, and meter ^(affe (jgen.~) indeed in most countries, was fully impressed etn feber Cym.) C *>on eittem with an idea of the peculiar cunning and malig- feften ©Icmben bev befonbern 3Serfct>Iagen^eit unb i nity of „dumbies/*) lifted 33oe^ett ber £aubfimnmen burc^brungen mar) Ijeben m * 2 it with an apparent intent to fling it bte £>6£e uwerfennbar niebewerfen down vehemently. Before the nurse could in- nut £>efttgiett @£e nod) ein* terpose, the Countess had flung the stone, — not fdjreiten PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 237 i however , as the servant had apprehended, at the fcocf) Setb befurdtfen auf child, but on the floor, where, of course, it made fonbern Soben naturltd) nieberfaf* a great noise. The child immediately awoke, ten nut taut ©etofe ewad^en and cried. The Countess, who had looked with weinert lauerti maternal eagerness to the result of her experiment 33eforgntg auf (Srfjolg 3?erfu$ 01: fell on 2 her knees in J a transport of joy. nun C freubctrunfen ); benn She had discovered that her child possessed the ftcb fiberjeugen {pres. subj^) sense which was wanting in herself. She exhi- ©tnn abgeben 206 ge* bited on many other occasions simiiiar proofs of ben Ux d^n(td) 33en>et$ intelligence, but none so interesting. ©o)arfftnn; j'ebocb ber ruprenber mare. HUMANITY. Queen Caroline, wife of George (he £>a man 213 ©emajrttn " 17S 2 1 Second, being informed that her eldest tyaken ,25 £tnterbrtngen 97 daughter (afterwards Princess of Orange), was nad^erig Dramett babm 238 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 5 accustomed , at going to rest, to employ bte ©enwfmfjeft toemi fid) jur dlvfyt begeben ju lajfen 2 one of the Ladies of the court in reading aloud a son £ofbame wrlefen to l her till 3 she should drop asleep; and that on 2 ftd? einfcfyfafen 0«fi/.) 8 bet one occasion the ' Princess 3 suffered the 4 fte ungefunbert 7 lady, who was indisposed, to continue the 5 fati- wwcf)f fortfegen er* 6 guing duty until, she fell down in a miiben33ef$afttgung fo tange, btg tterben of)n* swoon, determined to inculcate on her daughter mddjrtg, befdjftefjen fte betbrtngen ~CdaiJ a lesson of humanity. The next uwergegft'cbe Sefjre ber 9D?enf$ftd;fett. barctuf fofgenb night, the 2 Queen, when 3 in bed, fee frf)on ju war, sent for the 4 Princess, and commanded her to rufen faffen gebieten 213 read aloud. After some time her Royal Highness £o!?ett began to be tired of standing, and paused, mute jle£en etnc ^attfe tnadjett in hopes of receiving an order to be (*/«/. *.)£offnung {def.artj ftcb seated. ,,Proceed/ ; said her Majesty. In a fe§en. %lnx wetter 2)od>na4) short time a second pause seemed to plead Kein 2Beife ^aufe baS SBerlangen PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 239 for rest. „Read on/ 4 said the auetrttcfen nadfj etnem ®t#e jitlefen 2 3 1 2 Queen again. The Princess again stopped and again tinljaltm abexmaU received an order to proceed, till at length, faint fortfa&ren erfcf)cpft and breathless, she was forced to complain., .Then", 3 at$em(o£ jwingen Slffo L 2 said this excellent parent, „if you thus 5 feel ©cutter bit fofefjr empfmben the pain A of this exercise for one evening t>as Unattgenejwe gbtftrengung ma^renb only, what must your attendants feel who do Same fetbeti tyuh mftjfeti it every night? Hence learn my btefes 9Woge bid) biefes 6ele$rcn daughter, never to indulge your own ease frojmen bte 206 33equemii(Jjfeif while you suffer your attendants to endure jugefeen t onnen Umgebung jujtefjen 213 unnecessary fatigue. Gmnubung FEMALE COURAGE. During the siege of Gibraltar, in 1782, the Count d'Artois came to St, Roch, to visit the place and beftd;ttgen works. — While his Highness was 3 inspect- Sefhmg*tt>erfe in Slnfcbetn 240 PK03ILSCUOUS EXERCISES. ing the 2 lines, in l company with the Duke de nepmen 33egtcttung QgenJ Crillon, they both alighted with their suite, and cibftetgen nebft ©efotge all lay flat upon the ground , to avoid the fid) fegcn 23oben 96 entgef)en 206 effects of a bomb that fell near a part of the ftofgen fctnfaKen btcfrt an barracks where a Frenchwoman had a canteen. Sfaferne s. SrcttrjofCe) s Jtfavfebenterbube This woman, who had two children on her arm at the time, rushed forth with them, and C gerabe ) pcrfcet fturjen nadjbem having seated herself, with the utmost sang-froid, 109 Kaltblutfgfett on the bomb-shell, she put out the match, thus anSloftfjeti Cunte unb 2 1 extricating from danger all that were abmnben 149 * bte broljenbe ©efa^r around her, many of whom witnessed biefer nut anfeljen {pluperf^) this courageous and devoted act. His Highness gefdjmtf rewarded this intrepid female by bestowing on unerfitrocfen SBetfe tnbem au£fe$en J69 her a pension of three francs a day, and en- 213 ®nabengef)a(t ]92 »er* gaged to promote her husband after the siege; fpredjen beforbern Sefagerung * The Nom. is already mentioned before „put out". PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 241 while the duke de Crillon, imitating the 2 generous example of the prince, ensured to her likewise a g]ffu$em ebenn>ojjt daily payment of five francs. ®e$aUtn. FILIAL AFFECTION. I. ■i i Who has not heard, and who has not shed tears at hearing, of [ that beautiful and in— oXi er er^dMen Ijoren 169 3 teresting girl of 2 only eight years of age , who C aci)ticu)rtg ) went every morning to the Place de la Revolution nac^bte to mourn and lament the death of her mother, who 96 fcetrauern bewetnen 2J7 was executed there ? This child took many fnnrttfjlen bort ftcbbettenen 2I2 grogt precautions to escape observation ; but 23orftcJ)t {sing?) 96 ftcf) entjiejjen 213 fcennod; her manner was at length noticed by some woman enbfto) etn SBetb who sold fruit near the spot. Being £5bft m ber 9fd^e ba fctegrautteSfeine 3 2 1 asked the cause of her tears, „Ah . she said, urn my poor mother, whom I loved so well, died 242 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. where I now stand ; but oh ! do not, I ■ beg of you, tell any 3 one that you saw me cry, for 40 B-4- 57 written 2 J that, perhaps, would cause the death of my brother fonrtett and my sisters." After this guileless answer, unfcefcmgen which greatly affected her audience, she hastily tief erftyuttew 3^orer etttgft 2 1 retired, and was never seen there again. It Jmweg&egefcen ( was afterwards known that this early victim of ©pdter erfujjr man ) affjufruf) 4 filial affection died in a few 8 weeks bowed J ttad;f?er meter- down by 2 a grief which she could not cast fceugen Summer 2I2 fttf> er* off. totfyvm 2[1 ii. Another child was the happy means of saving her father's life. He was a Creole of St. Domingo, and was guilty of no other crime than f otttten bef$utbtgt werben 5 8 that of being rich and preserving the inheritance tut ©ejtfc {gen.') i of his forefathers. At 2 that time when the con- PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 243 tagious example of the French revolution had spread as far as the New World, the horrible ttorbringen and) big in grdfjtidj practice was adopted of 3 assembling in 2 aSerfa^ren 125 ftcfe bebtenen 212 96 jufammenbrtttgen groups the ] unfortunate victims who were or- £>aufen t>er* dered to be executed, and 4 then firing indis- urtjjetfen jum £obe aWbann 96 ojjne criminately upon them with cannons, loaded Untcrfdneb uttter 109 3T2 with grape-shot. ftartcttfcfyen The eyes of the Creole had been blindfolded, 45 aerbinben and he stood among a crowd of other unfortunate beings , expecting every instant the signal of death. 149 When, however, the 3 order to "discharge the b @ben alo man abfeuern 2 I artillery was about to 4 be given, a little girl ©efcp<3 tm-SJegriff 125 rushed forward, with a loud cry of „My father! J)etbet ftiirjen ber 3fef oh my father ! " and making her way through the ftdfj bajjnen 217 etn victims, threw her little arms about her parent's 8d)(acf)topfer ber Setter neck, and waited for the moment of dying with ertoarfen w 244 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. him. In vain were all threats or entreaties; neither ttergebeng (Srmctfnmng the representations of her danger, nor the com- mands of her father could intimidate her. In reply abfdf)recfen (2luf t>ef* to the latter, she earnestly repeated, „Oh, my fen 33ttten ) nut ernft 33tirf father, let me die with you." What power has fcu 40 fcotf) virtue over the most ferocious minds ! This unex- ©emittb pected accident disconcerted the commander SSorfctttctufjer gaffuttgbrtngen (mitptmSSRoxk* 3 i of the massacre : — doubtless he was a father befe£f 33eauftrctgtetO ojjne 3tt>eifcf 2 too ! The voice of admiration, and exclamations of pity, which he heard from all sides, touched his heart, and under some specious pretext, the Creole was delivered from the expected punish- tvo&enD ment, and, accompanied by his child, re-conducted to prison: whence he soon afterwards obtained cuts n>el* C befrett his release. After that happy escape, he was werfcen )?angenarf) (Srrettuug often accustomed to relate, with feelings of tender pfkgen emotion, the heroic action of his little girl, then 3todjter onlv ten years of age. I* 245 APPENDIX. GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. Exceptions of masculine terminations. I. e I. The following are ? eminine : hk Sldjfet, shoulder Die Dteffel , nettle „ 2topel, lamb ,MuteV, vermicelli „ Simfel, blackbird , Staged , rasp n angel , hook , Otaffel , rattle * Slfcel, magpie , Kegel, rule ,, SBucfet, knob, boss , Sdjad&tel, box „ SDeidjfel, pole Cto a car- , ©djaufel, shovel riage) , ©djaufei, swing „ SDroffel f thrush , ©d;inbel f shingle r. (SM&Cl, acorn , Sdjuffel, dish * gacfel, torch , Semmel, roll, bread r/ Seffet, fetter , @tdjel, sickle „ @abel, fork , ©ptnbel, spindle „ ®ei£et, scourge * , @taffel, step of a stair* „ ©urgel, throat case „ <§ummel, drone , ©to^el, stubble „ tfartoffel, potatoe , ©triegel, curry-comb „ Muo>d, ball , Safel, table „ jhippel, dome; cupola , trommel, drum „ Mangel, j mangle , SBatyel, quail n Sftange, , SBaffel, kind of cake n muffiti, shell , conch , UBinbel , child's napkin „ SKabel, needle f SBurjel, root * ©etfjel, hostage is mas. 246 APPENDIX. MASCULINE TERMINATIONS. II. These are neuter. bag 2)Mttet , means bag ©iegel, seal „ (Saipttel, chapter n SBtefel, ferret, weasel ,, ©egel, sail III. en. The following are neuter ; bag 5Umofen , , alms bag £el;en, fief „ SBecfcn, basin u 2Ba:p:pen, coat of arms „ gitllett, colt „ Seidjen, mark, sign „ ^tffen , pillow, cushion IV. ex. The following are feminine 3 bie 5lber, vein bit Mapptt , clapper „ Siujler, oyster ff £auer, lurking, lurch „ Gutter, butter „ Seber, liver „ 2)auer, space of time „ Seier, lyre „ (Sifter, mag-pie ,, better, ladder * Safer, fiber /, Sftauer, wall f , geber, pen „ Matter, . adder „ geter, solemnization r, Dtter, otter „ goiter, rack, torture „ (Shelter , barn „ J&atfter , halter „ ©cfyieuber , sling „ hammer, small room „ (Bfyulut , shoulder „ belter, wine,press „ Xrauer, mourning » liefer, pine „ SBmtyer, eye-lash „ fflammtx , fastening, „ Sitter, a kind of gui- cramp tar V. These are neut. ba$ Sitter, age bag gutter , food ; lining „ 93auer, cage (of a dress) „ (Siter, matter (pus) „ (Sitter, railing- „ duter, dug „ JHafter , fathom „ genftet;, window „ £ager, an object to „ geuer, fire rest or slep „ guber, a (waggon) on ; a mili- load; cask tary camp of certain „ Rafter, vice capacity „ Seber, leather APPEXDIX. FEMININE TERMINATIONS. 247 ba$£ubev, carrion u fSHalitt, a dry measure „ SReffer, knife „ Sftieber , boddice „ Rafter , pattern „ ^Joiner, bolster, cushion bo&d&ber, oar, helm u ttfer, bank, shore » CLDaffer , water „ SBetter, weather n 3Bunber , wonder „ Simmer i room Exceptions of feminine terminations. VI. eu The folio wing are mas. ber SBrci , pap „ ^tapagei, parrot VII. aft. mas. fcer^aft, sap Juice „ ©djafi, handle bag ®i , egg, is neuter. neat. ba$«§aft, hold, hasp, clasp „ *petfd)afr, seal (for impression) VIII. alt. These are mas. ber ©afolt, basalt bet «&alt, M ©el) alt , salary IX. aeH mas. bet 9Betbad)t, suspicion X. uncj. ber S)ung, manure XI. utfy. hold ber Sprung , leap , bound mas, ber Tlmij , courage Note. 2Bctb , woman,' grdulein , young lady: Sftctbd&eu, 248 APPENDIX. NEUTER TERMINATIONS. Exceptions of neuter terminations etc. XII. Of metals , are mas. ber (Stafyl, steel bev 3mf, zinc bet Xonxbad, pinchbeck XIII. Of countries etc. are fern. Those ending in et, as; bie 23erberct, Barbary bte XvLvhi , Turke3 r etc. also. bte ©dfivoet^ , Switzerland bte jttimm , Crimea n *fol& Palatinate „ SMolbau, Moldavia „ mxt, Marche(a dis- „ SBetterau, a country in trict of the Grand- Germany) Duchy of Hessia and the following are mas. ber ®au , ancient name for districts of Germany ; ber Sftfyemgcut , a country in Nassau, near the banks of the Rhine. XIV. Of reiteratives are mas. bev ©ebraucfy , use „ ©ebanfe, thought „ ©efyorfam, obedience „ ©enuf, enjoyment „ ®enttf), smell XV. and these fern. bte ($ebulb , patience „ ®eMl)r , impost, tax „ ©efafyr , danger XVI. nif. The following are fern. t> et* ©efang , song, singing „ ©efci)macf , taste „ ©eftcutf, offensive smell „ ©efcrinn, gain bte®cfcfyitf)te, history „ ($e[d)toulft, swelling bteSBebrdngmjj, grievance, oppression „ $8etvubnt#, affliction „ 33efitmmer~ concern ntfi „ SBeforgrig, apprehension „ SSetocmtwif, juncture bte (Impfdttg; conception ntf, „ (ftlaubntfj, permission „ gdutttijj, putrefaction „ gmfiernijj, darkness „ ^enntntf, knowledge „ 2Btlbui$, wilderness APPENDIX. NEUTER TERMINATIONS. 249 XVII. t&unu The following are mas. bet 3rrttutm , error ret Sfteidjrfium , riches XVIII. far. mas. fern. bet @enfal« broker on 'change rie £ruBfal, affliction XIX. Substantives of two genders^ Note. Words marked thus * have also different plu- rals : F. Gram. P. 23. bet*Sttnb, volume rae 53ant , tie ^ ribbon „ *Q3auer, peasant r , Sonet , cage n »u march he SQSatfdj , marsh „ 2flajt p mast „ 9Raft, fattening food for cattle IT 250 APPENDIX. DECLENSIONS. bev * 2ttenfd), man bag SWenfd) , a female of low habits « aReffet, one who mea- sures „ SMeffer, knife „ *9to9r, moor^a native of Mauritania „ TMjx, fen, bog „ ?M, parcel ,, $acf, rabble , „ Pletf , rice „ Sgeis, twig „ *@$Uk, shield „ @d)ttb, sign-board „ @djtoutji, bombast bte ©cfyttmiji , swelling r, @ee, lake „ @ee, sea „ ©proffe, sprout , off- „ ©projfe, step of a lad- spring- der „ *6ttf* f peg, bodkin bag ®tift , ecclesiastical foundation bte ©tenet , tax „ ©tetter, rudder, helm bet 3$e8 , volume, part „ Sftcit l , share „ *-3#et. fool » %f)OX, gate „ SSerbienji, gain, earning „ ?lkrbtettfi, i merit „ SSortoanb, pretence , subterfuge bte 23ortt)anb , , partition wall bieSBeijv, defence , weapon bag SBc^r , wear (weir) bet 3eug , woven stuffs „ 3eug, material to be made up into something; also stuff, figuratively. Declensions. XX. Exceptions of DecL I. The folloAving nouns of R. I. are declined and form their pi. like decl. II. (pi. er)* 1 The compounds of this word, as, 9intfjeil , 9tad)tf)eil, SDovtfyeil, are always masculine. APPENDIX. DECLENSIONS. 25 i Note. Those marked * do not admit of a change of vowel in the plural. ber®eift, spirit t>er Dxt , place „ ®ott, god (heathen) „ fftatfo, brink, border „ Ztib , body n 2Mb, forest ,, Sftann, man „ SBitrm, worm These like decl. IV. (pi. en.) btr Q3dr , bear ber SRenfdj , man Chumau ,, l$l)vi)t, christian species) n *3>ont, thorn „ Tlotjx, moor . gets, rock „ *ftatr, fool » giirft, prince, sove- „ *Ddjg, ox, bull reign » 5Prin§ , prince « ®etf, fop , absurd „ *$faEni, psalm person , t Sdjmeta , pain, grief „ *Ottf, count (sing. decl. I.) n ©clb, hero „ Strang , sycophant » £etr, master, Mr. , ,-, 8tral)l r beam j ray lord (sing. decl. I.) „ §trt, shepherd i» £pa§, sparrow „ £eu(poet.] > lion „ £§or, fool n *2Rajl, mast (siug. decl. I.) The follow like decl. II , (pi. er). ba$ ©ewanb, garment ba$ ©efcfjjledjt, race, sex, ge- ,, ®emad), chamber neration M ©emutt?, temper, mind „ @eft$t, face ,, ©efpenji , spectre These like decl. IV. fcer ©efell, journeyman (to a trade) bet @eitof , associate These (of R. 3) like decl. II. bag ^ofpital , j fca3 tSavital , capital (iu ar- „ epM, \ ll0Sl,ital chitecture) CV. Gr. P. 24.) Note, ©er %i)U , tea — is monosyllabic in the nam. sing, but dissyll.fin the gen. and dat.sing. and throughout the pi. number; without any other addition than ti for the dat. pL 252 APPENDIX. DECLENSIONS XXI. Exceptions of decl. II. The following substantives (R. 1) are declined and form their pi. like decl. I (pi. e). Note. Those marked * do not admit of a change of vowel for the pi. basket, garden-bed tag Sfcefc, net „ Sled) , tin plate „ $aar, pair,, couple „ *Soot, boat „ $ferb , horse „ *.ffltob-# bread r, -?fttttb, pound n ©tug, thing ,i *$Ult, desk « «*». ore , metal „ S^ec^t , right, law n Seft, festival „ 9tei$, empire „ * gio§ , raft „ Selj, deer „ *£aar, hair „ *|bf, steed, horse „ £eer, army n *©$af, sheep ,, ©rffci number of a „ ship publication „ *©d>od, score(twenty) r, *3a|t, year „ Seil, rope w * 3otf> , yoke „ <3ieb, sieve „ Mme , knee h @*>iet, game, play „ £r*U$# cross „ StiUE, pieee „ *£oo* f lot n £f)tet, animal ,, got*. half an ounce „ 2£erf, work „ *Wa^, measure 9 „ *SBrijr , ear XXII. Exceptions of decl. III. The following substantives (R. 1) form their plural only after decl. IV. (n or en). berSaier, a Bavarian ber3utt>e(, jewel „ * Salter , peasant „ SRudfel , muscle * APPENDIX. DECLENSIONS. 253 m ^antoffcl , slipper bet Srtefci , boot „ Stacfyel, dart, sting » better, cousin XXIII. Exceptions of del. IV. The following substantives (R. 1) ; used former- ly to terminate with n in their nom. sing, as if be- longing to decl. III. (R. 1 ) ; modern writers have dropped the rt ; the consequence of which is , that in the gen. , dat. and ace. sing, they are declined like Secfen (decl. III.) and that their plur. termi- nates like the present declension. bergriebeOO, peace berDiame(n), name „ gunfe (n), spark „ (SameQi), seed r, @ebanfe(n) thought „ wick „ *Pfab , path - Sold), dagger „ $ol, pole (N. or S.) „ (Stbam , son in law „ 5Jun!t , point m Sorft, forest „ ©aim, salmon, fresh „ @ema$l, spouse „ ©cfcaft, handle, shaft „ ©rab, degree „ ©taat, starling, , ®uvt, girth „ ©tOff, stuff, matter „ «§atm, halm „ Sag , day „ <£>ero!b , herald „ Scroti, throne » £er$og, duke „ SBerluj* , loss „ £orjl, aerie „ SJetfudj, trial ,, $Uf, hoof APPENDIX. 255 CHANGE OF VOWEL. 6) Those marked thus * Appendix XX. c) Those in t§, of which however few have any pi. d~) Most words of foreign origin of more than one syll. coming within the rules of this decl. e) A few nouns in @e, being derivatives of verbs, as, bag ®efit$, the request They are for the most part abstract nouns having no plur. XXVI. Decl. II. The only exceptions of change of vowel in this decl. are the monosyll. neut. nouns which form their plural irregularly and are to be found marked thus * Appendix XXL XXVII. Decl. III. The following substantives are the only ones that do admit of a change of vowel in this decl. berSlcfer, field (arable) bev Sftcmget, defect (when , Styfet, apple meaning wa?it, it admits „ 23rubet, brother of no pi.) „ ©arten, garden ., Sflantei, cloak „ £ammel, rani „ 9?aa,ei , nail „ «§anbel, d ispute; in which „ Dfen, stove^ oven sense it is never used but „ ^adjter , farmer in the pi. Also £tebe6l)anbel, „ (Battel, saddle intrigues (amours). „ (Etfjttaget, brother in law bag Softer , convent „ SBater, father „ SSogel, bird XXVIII. Decl. V. The only nouns of this decl. admitting of the change of vowel are the exceptions enumerated Appendix XXIV, 256 APPENDIX. Adjectives. XXIX. The following- adjectives do not admit the change of vowel in the comparative und super- lative degrees. barfd) , harsh lofe, loose blag, pale morfdj , rotten (of bunt, gay (of colour) wood etc.) fabe, inspid naft, naked faff*, false plump , rude, awk- fladj*, flat; smooth ward ftoij, glad vafd) , brisk getabe , straight rot), raw- Qefunb , healthy fanft, soft filatt, smooth Wiaff, loose w, hollow fcfyianf , slender Ijolb, kind, favour- W»ff» steep, rough able fal*r proud m, bald jlumpf, blunt, dull farg, parsimonious toll, mad flax, clear *>ott, full fnapp , narrow toaljr , true Idjm, lame §a^m, tame * Changes in derivatives 5 as, oberflacfylidj, superficially. LIBRARY OF CONGRESS I iiiii iiiii mil Jill illil ill 003 225 093 2